LG Electronics USA L705I PCS GSM Phone User Manual
LG Electronics USA PCS GSM Phone
Contents
- 1. Users Manual 1
- 2. Users Manual 2
Users Manual 2
[Filter] Shows messages that meet certain conditions. 䋺 Display mail sent to a specific Address address. X Select item X Select/input address 䋺 Display mail with a specific subject. Subject XEnter subject 䋺 Display protected mail. Protected Not protected 䋺 Display unprotected mail. 䋺 Display mail with an image Image attached. 䋺 Display mail with an i-motion movie i-motion attached. 䋺 Display mail with a melody Melody attached. 䋺 Display i-mode mail. Mail 䋺 Only display SMSes. SMS 䋺 Display all mail in the folder. All [Protect on/off] Protect On/Off 䋺 Protect or unprotect the selected mail. X"Yes" 䋺 Select and protect or unprotect mail. Protect selected on/off XCheck off the mail to protectXI[Done]X"Yes" • Press M[Menu], choose from "Mark all", "Release all", "Switch view" 䋺 Protect all mail in the folder. Protect all X"Yes" Protect all on/ 䋺 Unprotect all mail in the folder. off X"Yes" [Send Ir data] 䋺 Sends selected mail via Infrared. Send X"Yes" Send all 䋺 Send all mail in the folder by infrared. XEnter security codeXEnter Auth. data Password X"Yes" [Copy to microSD card] Copy one 䋺 Copies selected mail to microSD memory card. X"Yes" Copy all 䋺 Copies all mail in the folder to microSD memory card. XEnter the security codeX"Yes" [UIM] Copy to UIM Move to UIM Copy from UIM Move from UIM 䋺 Copy the selected SMS to the UIM. 䋺 Move the selected SMS to the UIM. 䋺 Copy the selected SMS to the FOMA handset. 䋺 Move the selected SMS to the FOMA handset. [Memory status] Display number of mails in sent mail BOX. Note• Addresses matched completely and subjects matched even partially are displayed. Sent Mail Details Screen Sub Menu Sent mail details screen (P171) XM [Menu]XPerform the following operations [Edit] Edit and send a sent mail.→P161䇮 P181 [Move] Move the displayed mail to another folder. XSelect destination folder [Delete] Delete a displayed mail. X"Yes" [Protect on/off] Protect or release the displayed mail. X"Yes" [Store] Save the phone numbers and email addresses in the displayed mail to Phonebook.→P169 [Attach file] Save, play or view, or delete images attached to the displayed i-mode mail.→P169 [Inline image] Save images contained in the displayed mail or view the information.→P170 Mail Continue on the next page 177 [View settings] 䋺 Sets the number of lines scrolled Scroll when H is pressed at the mail Display Screen. X"1 line"/"3 lines"/"5 lines"/"Page" Character Size䋺 Set a font size for text on mail display screen. X"Small"/"Standard"/"Large" [Copy] Copy contents of the displayed mail. Message 䋺 Select and copy contents of text. →P252 Address 䋺 Copy a destination. If there are multiple recipients, select addresses to copy. Subject 䋺 Copy a subject. [Save template] Save Deco-mail as a template. XC[Select]XEdit titleXI[Done] [Export] Send IrDA 䋺 Send the displayed mail via IrDA. X"Yes" Copy to microSD 䋺 Copy the displayed mail to the microSD memory card. X"Yes" FOMA card (UIM) 䋺 Copy or move the selected SMS to the UIM, or copy or move the selected SMS from the UIM to the handset. X"Copy to UIM"/"Move to UIM"/ ""Copy from UIM"/"Move from UIM" Note • Up to 500 mails can be protected. • Protected mails cannot be deleted. [View settings] Switch䋺 Set how to display mail. View X"1 lines subjt"/"1 lines add"/"1 lines name"/ "2 lines add"/"2 lines name" Sort 䋺 Sort mails by the condition you specify. X"Subject asc"/"Subject desc"/"Address asc"/"Address desc"/"Date asc"/"Date desc" [Filter] Shows messages that meet certain conditions. Address䋺 Display mail sent to a specific address. X Select item X Select/input address Subject 䋺 Display mail with a specific subject. XEnter subject Image 䋺 Display mail with an image attached. i-motion䋺 Display mail with an i-motion movie attached. Melody 䋺 Display mail with a melody attached. 䋺 Display i-mode mail. Mail 䋺 Only display SMSes. SMS 䋺 Display all unsent messages. All [Send Ir data] Send 䋺 Sends selected mail via Infrared. X"Yes" Send all 䋺 Send all unsent messages via infrared. data XEnter security codeXEnter Auth. Password X"Yes" [Copy to microSD card] Copy one䋺 Copies selected mail to microSD memory card. X"Yes" Copy all 䋺 Copy all unsent mail to the microSD memory card. XEnter the security codeX"Yes" [Memory status] Display number of mails in unsent mail BOX. Received Mails/Sent Mails/Recent Mails Unsent Mail List Screen Sub Menu Unsent mail list screen (P171) XMove cursor to mailXM[Menu]XPerform the following operation [Delete] Delete 䋺 Delete the selected message. X"Yes" Deletes 䋺 Select and delete message. selected XCheck off the mail to item deleteXI[Done]X"Yes" • Press M[Menu], choose from "Mark all", "Release all", "Switch view" Delete 䋺 Delete all unsent messages. XEnter the security codeX"Yes" all 178 Mail Using Mail Logs Received / Sent mail logs show the last 30 mails that were sent/received. Also, up to 60 received or sent mails are recorded in "Recent Mails". These logs can be used to make emails, and save addresses to the phonebook. • If more entries have been recorded than can be saved, the oldest entries will be overwritten first. Example: When displaying the received mail logs The Stand-by displayXL(Hold for 1+ seconds) 䂓 To display Sent mails The Stand-by display XR(for 1+ seconds) 䂓 To display recent mail The Stand-by display XA(for 1+ seconds) Ex.: Received Mail History List Screen Select a Logged mail • I[Mail] : Creates mail to selected entry's recipient/ sender. [Customize call] Edit the phone number in the selected entry and dial. You can save a phone number to the Phonebook using C [Save]. XL on the Phone number entry screen XLXK to move the cursor to the place to change X change the phone number XA [Change list]䋪 Recent calls䋺 Display all incoming and outgoing call logs. Recent mail 䋺 Display all incoming and outgoing mail logs. Received 䋺 Display Received calls. Calls Received 䋺 Displays the Received mail logs. mail 䋺 Displays phone redial log. Redial Sent mail 䋺 Displays the Sent mail logs. • The item for the currently displayed log is not shown. Ex.: Received Mail History List Screen a The name entered into the phone book b Other party's mail address c Receive/Sent date & time 䂓 Icons displayed on the received/send log/Recent Mails Icon [Delete] Delete the selected log entry. X"Yes" [Delete all]䋪 Delete all entries from the mail logs. X"Yes" 䋪䋺 This option does not appear on the received/sent mail logs/recent mail detail screen. Mail setting Setting FOMA Handset Mail Functions Settings Description Received mail Sent mail Communication Received SMS Configuring Communication Settings Sent SMS Mail and SMS that were Received/Sent while Roaming* 䃨 䋪䋺 The received/sent date and time is shown on local time. Received/Sent Mail Log/Recent Mail Sub Menu Move cursor to the received/sent logX M[Menu]XPerforms the following operations [Video phone call] Make a Video Phone. [Compose mail] Creates mail to selected entry's recipient/sender. Go to Step 3 in "Creating and Sending i-mode Mail" (P161). [Add to phonebook] Save the selected log's address to the phonebook. Go to Step 2 in "Saving Contacts to the Phonebook from Received or Dialed Calls" (P80). • Saves only unsaved mail addresses. Default Receive option set: OFF Receive attch file: All checkmarked Check new messages : All checkmarked Mail menu screen(P160) X "Mail setting" X "Communication" X Perform the following operations [Receive option set] To enable/disable the Receive option (P167), set whether to receive i-mode mail automatically. On 䋺 Do not automatically receive mails. Off 䋺 Automatically receive mails. [Receive attach file] Set attachment files to be acquired when receiving i-mode mail. XCheck off the item to be downloadedXI[Done] Mail Continue on the next page 179 [Check new messages] Sets request settings when using "Check new messages". XCheck off item to checkXI[Done] Note • When this option is set to "ON", i-mode mail cannot be received automatically. Incoming i-mode mail is kept at the i-mode Center, and the Receive notify screen(P162) appears. • When receiving the attached file so as to be set the unreceivable file type, you can receive attachments by selecting their file names shown in the body text.→P169 Edit Editing Header/Sign/Quotation Default Edit header: Non Edit signature: Non Edit quotation> Auto attach: Checkmarked on "Signature" Mail menu screen (P160) X "Mail setting" X "Edit" X Perform the following operations [Edit Header] Set a header to be inserted into the i-mode mail text. XC[Edit]XEnter header [Edit Signature] Set a signature to be inserted to i-mode mail text. XC[Edit]XEnter signature [Edit Quotation] Set a symbol indicating quotation from a received mail used for replying by quoting. XC[Select]XEdit quotesXI[Done] [Auto attach] Set whether to automatically attach a header or signature when composing i-mode mail. XPlace a check mark next to an item to be attached XI[Done] Configuring Display Settings 180 Mail [Scroll] Sets the number of lines scrolled when H is pressed at the the Mail detail screen or the Preview screen. X"1 line"/"3 lines"/"5 lines"/"Page" [Mail list] Set how to display mail on the Mail list screen. X"1 line subject"/"1 line address"/"1 line name"/"2 lines address"/"2 lines name" [Folder security] Sets security for Mail Menu's send/receive/unsent mail box. To display a security-enabled mail box, the security code must be entered. XEnter security codeXCheck the items to enable security onXI[Done] [Melody auto play] Set whether to automatically play attached or pasted melodies on the Mail display screen. X"ON"/"OFF" [Receiving display] Set whether to preferentially open the Receive results screen when i-mode mail or Message R/F is received while operating the FOMA handset. 䋺 Open the Received Results screen. Alarm preferred Operation 䋺 Carry out FOMA handset operations without displaying the Received result preferred screen. Other Configuring Other Settings Mail menu screen (P160) X "Mail setting" X "Others" X Perform the following operations [Check setting] Confirm the contents set in "Mail setting". [Reset setting] Reset the contents set in "Mail setting" to the default. XEnter the security codeX"Yes" Note View Default [Font size] Set a font size for text on the Mail detail screen screen. X"Small"/"Standard"/"Large" Font size: Standard Scroll: 1 line Mail list: 2 lines name Folder security: Non checkmarked Melody auto play: ON Receiving display: Alarm mode Mail menu screen(P160) X "Mail setting" X "Display" X Perform the following operations • The contents of the header and signature will not be reset. SMSCompose/Send Creating and Sending SMS (Short Message Service) Message • You can send and receive SMS to/from parties of overseas carriers other than DoCoMo. Visit DoCoMo's web site for countries and overseas carriers available. Mail Menu Screen(P160)X"SMS"X "Compose SMS" [Send via] Send SMS. [Save] Save SMS being created or edited in Unsent mail box. [Add address] 䋺 Select an address from the Open Phonebook phonebook. XSelect phonebook Sent Address 䋺 Select an address from the Sent mail logs. X Select a logged SMS 䋺 Select an address from the Received Received mail logs. address X Select a logged SMS Input Address䋺 Enter the receiver address directly. X Enter the phone number [Report request] Set whether to request for SMS delivery notification when SMS is sent.→P182 Compose SMS Screen Select (Receiver) fieldX"Input Address"XEnter the phone number • Up to 21 digits (including "+") can be entered. • The address can be selected from the Phonebook, Sent mail logs or Received mail logs.→P181 [Validity period] Set the duration a sent SMS can be kept undelivered at the SMS center.→P182 [Delete body] Body software. X"Yes" [Delete SMS] Delete the SMS being composed. X"Yes" Select (Body) fieldXInput body • The number of characters which can be entered differs depending on the settings in "SMS input character". Receive SMS Automatically Receiving SMS (Short Message Service) Message I[Send] Note • For a destination of an overseas carrier other than DoCoMo, enter in the order of "+" (Press 0 for 1+ seconds), "Country Code" and "other party's mobile phone number". For the mobile phone number, omit leading "0", if exist. Numbers may be entered in the order of "010", "Country Code" and "other party's mobile phone number" (to reply to overseas SMS received, enter "010"). • Characters may not be sent correctly to the other party depending on the radio wave reception level. • When you send an SMS to a receiver who uses a foreign carrier and the characters not supported by the carrier are included in the text you sent, those characters may not be displayed correctly. • Even if you set "Activate/Deactivate" to "Not notify", your Caller ID is sent to the other party. • You cannot reply to SMS sent with Unknown ID or from a public phone. Create SMS Screen Sub Menu SMS Composition Screen (P181) X M[Menu]XPerform the following operations When FOMA handset is in the service area, SMS is automatically received. • Up to 1000 received SMS messages including i-mode mail can be saved. However, the savable number depends on the amount of the data. When receiving i-mode mail, shown at the top of the screen is When the reception is complete, the Reception result screen opens. • You are forced to return to the screen before receiving mails if no operation is performed for approximately 30 seconds, Reception • Selecting "SMS" opens the Result Screen Received mail folder list screen. • Until the Detail screen of received SMS opens, appears at the top of the screen and (the number indicates the number of messages) appears on the Stand-by screen. Mail 181 Displaying New SMS Received Received Result Screen (P181)X"SMS" XSelect folder Select the SMS to display SMS Validity Period Default 3 days Set the length of time that a sent SMS will be kept at the SMS center if it cannot be delivered because the recipient is out of service area, etc. • If "None" is selected, sending the SMS message is retried after a while, then the message is deleted from the SMS center. Mail setting screen(P160) X "Mail setting" X "SMS"X "SMS Validity Period" X Select the period Received Mail Details Screen Entering SMS Message Text Check new SMS Checking for SMS (Short Message Service) Message SMS that could not be received because the handset was out of service area (or for other reasons) are stored in SMS Center. You can receive stored SMS by checking the SMS Center. • You cannot check from an out of service area. Default Sets maximum number of characters for SMS body. Mail setting screen(P160) X "Mail setting" X "SMS"X" SMS input character" Japanese (70 characters) : Maximum 70 characters. English (160 characters) : Maximum 160 characters. Japanese cannot be input. Mail Menu Screen (P160) X"SMS"X "Check new SMS" When the reception is complete, the Reception result screen opens. SMS Center SMS Settings Configuring SMS (Short Message Service) Settings SMS Report Default OFF Set whether to request an SMS delivery report after sending SMS. If this option is set to "ON", a message indicating that the SMS has been delivered to the receiver will be sent to you. Mail setting screen (P160) X "Mail setting" X "SMS" X"SMS Report request" X "ON"/"OFF" Note • The report will show the sent time and the number of the receiver. 182 Mail Japanese (70 characters) Default SMS center : DoCoMo You can configure the SMS center. You usually do not need to change this setting. M[Menu]X (Settings)X"International roaming"X"Network"X"SMS center" XPerform the following operation [SMSC] DoCoMo 䋺 Set DoCoMo as SMS Center address. 䋺 Set something other than DoCoMo as SMS Other Center address. [Address] When "Others" is selected for "SMS center", input connection address. [Type of number] Set when "Others" is selected for "SMS center", 䋺 If the SMS center phone number may Unknown be long distance, use this setting. International 䋺 If the SMS center phone number is long distance, use this setting. I[Done] i-appli What is i-appli?.................................................................................................................. Downloading i-appli from Site ......................................................................................... Starting i-appli ................................................................................................................... Save Mails from a Site or Mail.......................................................... i-appli To Function Automatically Starting i-appli .................................................................. Auto Start Set Viewing Various Information............................................................................................ Deleting i-appli .................................................................................................................. Displaying i-appli Site from i-appli .................................................................................. 184 185 185 189 189 190 190 190 183 What is i-appli DX? What is i-appli? By downloading i-appli from site, i-mode compatible FOMA handset (hereinafter, referred to as i-mode handset) can be made more convenient. For example, you can enjoy various games downloaded to i-mode handset and automatically check price by downloading i-appli for stock price information. In addition, map i-appli downloads minimum data that is required so that you can scroll the map smoothly. In addition, map i-appli downloads only necessary data, allowing smooth scrolling. Some i-appli allows to directly register data to phonebook or schedule or link with the Data box for saving and acquiring images. IP䋨 ᖱႎ䉰䊷䊎 䉴 ឭଏ⠪䋩 䌩 䉝 䊒䊥 䉭䊷䊛 䇮 ᩣଔᖱႎ䇮 etc. 䉻䉡 䊮 䊨 䊷䊄 䌩 䊝䊷䊄 ┵ᧃ 䌩 䊝䊷䊄 䉶䊮 䉺 䊷 • Downloading i-appli →P185 • Activating i-appli →P185 • Automatically Starting i-appli →P189 Note • Some i-appli may use a "serial number of your mobile phone/UIM". • Some i-appli may perform communications at starting. You can set to disable the communications.→P188 䂓 Using registered data Some i-appli software may be able to refer to, register or operate your i-mode handset registration data (phonebook, bookmark, schedule, images, Icon information). Following operations are enabled usingregistration data: • Add to phonebook • Using Icon information • Bookmark registration • Schedule registration • Image acquisition from Data box • Image saving to Data box 184 i-appli i-appli DX makes With i-appli DX, you can use i-appli more conveniently in such manners as to create mail with your favorite character screen or let you notified of the sender of received mail with a character's comment by linking with i-mode handset information (such as mail text, sent/ received mail history, phonebook data). 䂓 Using registered data Some i-appli DX may be able to refer to, register or operate registration data such as mails, sent mail logs, received mail logs, ring tone, in addition to registration data available to ordinary i-appli (Phonebook, Bookmark, schedule and images). Following operations are enabled usingregistration data: • Add to phonebook • Phonebook referencing • Using Icon information • Bookmark registration • Schedule registration • Using mail menu • Using Compose message screen • Referencing latest Redial logs • Open latest received call record • Referencing latest unread mail • Saving melody • Changing Ring tone (phone, mail, message) • Image acquisition from Data box • Image saving to Data box • Changing screen settings (the Stand-by display, Voice/Video call) Note • i-appli DX may perform communications regardless of software communication settings to confirm software validity. The communications count and timings differ from software. • You need to set the Time and Date in order to start an i-appli DX.→P47 Other Functions 䂓 Automatically starting i-appli You can automatically start software at a specified time, date or day of week. Some software can be automatically started at a time interval predefined in the software.→P189 䂓 Using camera You can use i-mode handset Camera from i-appli. • This function is available with i-appli compatible with Camera function. 䂓 IrDA You can communicate with a device installed with Infrared communication function using the i-appli. It can link to infrared communication-compatible devices to increase its functionalities.→P211 • This function can be used with infraredcompatible i-appli. • Depending on the other party's device, communication of some data may be restricted even with Infrared communications available. 䂓 Infrared remote control • If the maximum savable number of software is exceeded or there is not enough memory space, there will be the confirmation screen asking whether or not to delete another i-appli. If the memory free space is insufficient, you can select i-appli to delete confirming the required memory for it. Select "Yes" to deleteXPlace a check mark next to the i-appli youi delete confirming the required memoryXI[Delete]. If "Yes" is selected, the checked software is deleted and the download starts. • If the download of software fails due to weak signal reception, the software cannot be saved. • Even if the download of software fails due to weak signal reception after old software was deleted to make memory space on the FOMA handset, the old software cannot be restored. • Some software that starts immediately after downloaded cannot be saved. You can operate various device from i-appli such as household electrical appliances compatible with infrared remote control.→P213 For example, "G䉧䉟 䊄 ⇟⚵䊥 䊝䉮 䊮 (G-GUIDE EPG Remote Control)", saved by default, can be used as a remote TV controller linked with a TV program.→P188 • This function is available with i-appli compatible with infrared remote control function. The other party's device must have related i-appli. Downloading i-appli from Site You can download software from a site and save it to FOMA handset. • A maximum of programs can be downloaded and saved. This number may be reduced by the software's data size. Display SW info Display i-appli Information When Downloading Site DisplayedXSelect Program • I[Cancel] : Cancel downloading. 䂓 When "Display SW info" is set to "Display" Software information is displayed. When C[OK] X "Yes" to download the program. After downloading has completedX "Yes" Default Set whether to display software information when downloading the software. The downloaded software starts. • After the software is downloaded, the network set screen may be displayed depending on the software. To allow the software to carry out network communications, when the software is running, select "Yes". The settings can be changed afterwards from "SW setting".→P188 Note • At downloading, the confirmation screen may appear notifying of using "the phoneinformation data (stored data and serial number of your mobile phone/UIM)". Press "Yes" to start downloading. Select I[Detail] to check the details of the phone information data to be used. In this case, the "serial number of your mobile phone/UIM" is sent to the ISP (Internet Service Provider) over the Internet, so could be deciphered by third parties. However, your phone number, address, age, and gender are not notified to the ISP (Internet Service Provider) or others by this operation. • If you attempt to re-download software that was downloaded with a different UIM, the confirmation screen opens asking whether to overwrite it. Select "Yes" to overwrite. Not display M[Menu]X"i-appli"X"i-appli settings"X"Display SW info"X "Display"/"Not Display" Starting i-appli Stand-by display XI(1+ seconds after) Software List Screen 䂓 Icons on the Software List screen Icon Description Standard i-appli i-appli DX Auto-start set i-appli i-appli downloaded from an SSL site i-appli Continue on the next page 185 b Select software To start software from other software Some software can start a specified i-appli without returning to the Software list screen. Some software already has software to be started specified, and others do not. If the software to be started is already specified While performing an i-appli, a confirmation screen whether to start the specified software opens. Select the software while i-appli is runningX MSelect [Yes] If the software to be started is not specified While an i-appli is running, a confirmation whether to list the software appears. M[Yes]XSelect the software. If a security error occurs If you attempt to perform operations that are not permitted for the software, a security error is indicated and the error is recorded in "Security error history". →P190 If an abnormality occurs with the software If an abnormality occurs with the software, you can check the contents using the Trace output.→P190 To i-appli creators If software does not behave as expected while being created, you may want to refer to the Trace output. Note • Some software performs transmission whileSome software performs transmission while activated. You can change the settings in "Network set" of "Software set" not to automatically carry out transmission.→P188 • If there is an incoming voice call or video call when the software is running, you can answer the call pausing the software. After the call is terminated, the previous screen returns. • Even when the software is running, you can receivemail or Message R/F. The software keeps running, and at the top of the screen appears. To view the received mail or Message R/F, terminate the software. To view the received mail or Message R/F, terminate the software. • Images used by an i-appli䋪 or data you entered may be automatically sent to a server via the Internet. 䋪䋺 Images used by the i-appli include: images captured with Camera that is started from a Camera-linked (linkage) application, images obtained using infrared communication function of the i-appli, images downloaded from a site or web site, and images obtained from the Data box by the i-appli. • You cannot start software downloaded using adifferent UIM. • Some i-appli do not have sounds. 186 • Depending on the software, the IP (Information Provider) can access the saved program and directly disable its use. In this case, the software cannot be run or updated; it can be deleted, and the software information can be shown. As re-enabling the software requires an incoming signal, please direct your inquiries to the IP (Information Provider). • Depending on the software, the IP (Information Provider) can access the saved program data. • In the event that the IP disables/re-enables the software or accesses the data, the FOMA handset performs transmission and is displayed on the phone. Packet communication charges do not apply in this case. • If "Network set" of "Software set" is set to "Confirm every session", a confirmation screen whether to allow the communication appears. 䇸 Select"Yes"/"No" 䂓 Exiting i-appli PXSelect "Yes". i-appli Software List Screen Sub Menu Software list screen(P185)XMove cursor to the softwareXM[Menu]X Perform the following operation [Set i-appli to] Set the Activating conditions of the selected software. →P189 [Auto start time] Set whether to start the selected software automatically or not. And if you do, set the date and time.→P189 [Software set] Set the selected software.→P188 [Software info] Displays selected software's information. [Upgrade] Upgrade the selected software. X"Yes" [Delete] Delete software.→P190 Note • During an update, a confirmation screen may appear notifying of using the handset's data (stored data and serial number of the handset/ UIM)".䇸 Select "Yes" to start downloading. Select I[Detail] to check the details of the phone information data to be used. In this case, the "serial number of your mobile phone/UIM" is sent to the ISP (Internet Service Provider) over the Internet, so could be deciphered by third parties. However, your phone number, address, age, and gender are not notified to the ISP (Internet Service Provider) or others by this operation. Pump it up i-appli Pre-installed The following table shows pre-installed i-appli. Game Software other than the games Halloween Fever Pump it up 䊂䉮 䊜 ⛗ᢥሼ䊘䉬 䉾 䊃 (Deco-mail pictograph pocket) G䉧䉟 䊄 ⇟⚵⾮䊝䉮 䊮 (G-GUIDE Program List Remote Controller) FOMAⅣႺㅢା⏕䉝 䊒䊥 (FOMA Communication Environment Check Application) • The i-appli title may differ from the name displayed on the screen. Halloween Fever This is a puzzle game that you try to delete monster when 3 or more of the same monster are adjacent. The game ends when all the monsters have been deleted. Be careful about the order the monsters are deleted; if there are any undeletable monsters at the end, you will lose the game. Software list screen(P185)X "Halloween Fever" The menu screen opens. Perform the following operation [䉴 䉺 䊷䊃 (Start)] Start the game. [䉴 䊁 䊷䉳 (Stage] Press J to select the stage finished. [䊓䊦䊒 (Help)] Display the description and how to play the game. [䉰䉡 䊮 䊄 䉥䊐 (䉰䉡 䊮 䊄 䉥䊮 ) (Sound off (Sound on))] C toggles the sound effects on and off. 䂓Operations during the game This is a rhythm and action game that you try to push the buttons as they are indicated on the screen in rhythm to the music. As marks such as arrows scroll up from the bottom of the screen, please press the corresponding button when they reach the same marks on the top of the screen. In decreasing order, you will get a "PERFECT, GREAT, GOOD, BAD, MISS" depending on how close you were to the rhythm. If you get BAD or MISS above the certain number, the game will end. When you get several in a row, a combo will be displayed. Software list screen(P185)X"Pumpitup" The game title screen is displayed. The menu screen opens. Perform the following operation [䉴 䉺 䊷䊃 (Start)] Start the game. Select the song and difficulty level. Use XJ to select the music XCX"䊉 䊷䊙䊦 (Normal)"/"䊊䊷䊄 䇭 (Hard)" [ᣇᴺ (How to play)] Shows the function buttons. [䉥䊒䉲䊢 䊮 (Options)] Set whether to display sound, vibration, and animations or not. [䉮 䊙䊮 䊄 (Command)] Shows codes to make the game harder. Enter the code at the difficulty level selection screen. Random 䋺 Randomizes the kind and order of marks. Mirror 䋺 . Vanish 䋺 Vanish the marks in the middle of scroll. No Step 䋺 Do not show the marks (Press the button following your memory and music). Cancel 䋺 Cancels the commands set. 䂓 Operations during the game Move the cursor and select a monster to be Key Description Moving the cursor Select I[Menu] If "Yes" is selected, the game ends and the menu screen is shown. Restart the game. Returns to the previous screen. Press the button right after the mark wraps over. When the gauge vanishes, the game is over. • This sample screen may be different from the actual one. Key Description 1䋯3䋯7䋯9 Buttons corresponding to Left-up/Right up/ Left-down/Right-down arrows the button corresponding square(foot-shape) mark i-appli 187 䊂䉮 䊜 ⛗ᢥሼ䊘䉬 䉾 䊃 (Deco-mail pictograph pocket) FOMAⅣႺㅢା⏕䉝䊒䊥 (FOMA Communication Environment Check Application) This application confirms if the FOMA handset is in a FOMA High Speed Area. • Based on the results of FOMAⅣႺㅢା⏕䉝 䊒䊥 (FOMA Communication Environment Check Application), it displays the maximum transmission speed in the area. • There is no packet communication charge to use FOMAⅣႺㅢା⏕䉝 䊒䊥 (FOMA Communication Environment Check Application). • When using FOMAⅣႺㅢା⏕䉝 䊒䊥 (FOMA Communication Environment Check Application), please consult the "Usage and Warning" section. • According to environmental and electrical conditions, the network could have different speeds even if one is in the same place. • Please do not use the Multitask functions while running FOMAⅣႺㅢା⏕䉝 䊒䊥 (FOMA Communication Environment Check Application). This is an i-appli exclusively designed to quickly search and save Deco-mail pictographs that can be used as pictographs in i-mode mail. You can search for a Deco-mail pictograph provided by an information service provider from a theme such as "Category" or "Illustration characters", and save it on the FOMA handset quickly. Also, you can save multiple pictographs at once. If you find a Deco-mail pictograph you like, you can view the site introduction then access the site. • The monthly information fee will not be charged for "Deco-mail pictograph pocket". To access a site provided by an information provider, i-mode information fee may be charged separately. • Separate packet communication charges apply. • For details, refer to "Mobile Phone User's Guide [imode]". G䉧䉟 䊄 ⇟⚵⾮䊝䉮 䊮 (G-GUIDE Program List Remote Controller) • The screen image only provides an example. They differ from actual ones. A program list that is applicable to your location is displayed. Setting i-appli Operating Conditions Set operating conditions for each software. You can set to make communications automatically while software is active or whether to allow the reference to icon information, Phonebook or others. • Some items may not be changed depending on the software. This is a convenient application which combines a TV program list and a TV remote controller, and is free of monthly usage charges. You can obtain TV program information for any time slot, from anywhere and at anytime. You can acquire information on a program title, program description, start and end times and the G-code® for your local TV station. When you find a program of interest, you can send mail, using the "Recommendation Mail" function, with the program title and broadcast schedule to your friends. You can also control your TV remotely (some models cannot be controlled). • When using this application for the first time, you need to configure the settings and agree to the license agreement. • Separate packet communication charges apply. • For details, refer to the "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]". • For Infrared remote control, see "Using the Infrared Remote Control Function" (P213). 188 i-appli Software list screen(P185)XMove cursor to the programXM[Menu]X [Software set]XPerform the following operation [Network set] Set whether to make communications while software is active. X"Yes"/"No"/"Confirm every session" [Icon info] Set whether to permit the use of icon information for imode mail, Message R/F, in/out of service area, battery level, or Manner Mode when the software starts. X"On"/"Off" [View P.book/call records] Set whether to allow to reference the phonebook and reception history when software is started. X"Yes"/"No" [Change ring tone/image] Set whether to allow, when software is started, to automatically change an image and/or melody set for Ring tone or on the Stand-by display X"Yes"/"No"/"Confirm every start" X "Yes" Note Setting whether to Automatically Start • Depending on the settings, the software may not connect to the network in some conditions (Unread messages or battery level, etc.) • When this is set to "No", the software may not start, or real-time information may not be provided. • When this is set to "Yes", the software automatically connects to the network. While connected, packet communication charges apply. • When set to "Yes", information about the status of the handset as indicated by the presence of icons for unread mail, messages, battery level, Manner Mode, inside the service area, and outside the service area may be sent to Information Providers (IP) via the Internet in the same manner as "serial number of your mobile phone/UIM" is sent. The icon information may be intercepted by a third party. Software that needs Icon data may not function if this is set to "No". i-appli To Function Save Mails from a Site or Mail Sets whether to activate software from a site, mail, infrared transmission or barcode reader. Software list screen (P185)XMove cursor to softwareXM[Menu]X"Set i-appli to"XCheckmark to software allowed to activate Site i-appli to : Start the software from a site. Mail i-appli to : Start the software from a site. Ir i-appli to : Start the software from a site. Barcode i-appli to : Start the software from the barcode reader. I[Done] Auto Start Set Automatically Starting i-appli Default On You can set whether to start an i-appli automatically. M[Menu]X"i-appli"X"i-appli settings"X"Auto start set"X"On"/"Off" Setting Start Date/Time Set the date and time when the software starts automatically. Up to 3 settings can be configured. Software list screen(P185)XMove cursor to the softwareXM[Menu]X "Auto start time"XPerform the following operation [Time interval set] Applications will be launched at set intervals. [Start time set] Enable when you want to set the when i-appli will automatically start. After setting this option, you can set the following items. [Time] To set the date, use J to move the cursor to the place to change the date and enter the date with the dial keys (to set the date on the calendar screen, press C[Select] in the date entry field ). Operations on the Calendar screen → P234 To set the time, use J to move the cursor to the position, enter the time with dial keys, and switch between "AM" and "PM" with C (entering C in the time entry field, the time settings screen on which you can enter a date with dial keys and H is displayed). • Depending on the settings in "Date & Time format" (P106), the display order or format for the date and time may differ. [Repeat] Select a repeating pattern for auto-start. 1 time 䋺 Starts once automatically at the set date and time. Daily 䋺 Starts automatically at the specified time every day. Weekly 䋺 Starts automatically at the specified time on the specified day of the week every week. XCheck off the day to auto-start every weekXI[Done] I[Done] • Date and Time need to be set in advance in order to start an i-appli automatically.→P47 i-appli 189 Note • The software will not automatically start when: - The FOMA handset power is turned off - A call or communication is in progress - Another function is running - "Lock all" is set (even at the security code entry screen) - "i-appli" in "Data access lock" is currently is "On" (even at the security code entry screen) - The Auto-start time is same as the scheduled time for software update, an alarm, schedule, or To Do alarm. - For i-appli downloaded using another UIM - For i-appli with "Network set" is set to "Confirm every session" - For i-appli whose interval to launch is set within 10 minutes • Software is not started at a automatic start time if other software is active at that time. Also, software may not start while other functions are running. • If auto starts fails, icon appears in the Standby display. Selecting the icon displays the Auto start info (P190). icon disappears after the Auto start info is viewed. Viewing Various Information M[Menu]X[i-appli]X[i-appli info]X Perform the following operations [Security error history] Display a log of errors of software terminated due to a security error. • I[Delete] : Deletes the selected error history entry. X"Yes" [Auto start info] You can check whether software automatically started. You can view the information and the latest date and time when software started for up to 3 pieces of software set to start automatically. Start 䂾 䋺 The software automatically started successfully Start 㬍 䋺 The software failed to start automatically Start : The software has not started because the set time has not arrived [Trace info] Display the trace information of the software. • I[Delete] : Deletes the trace information of the software. X"Yes" Note • History or information which is not traced will not be shown. 190 i-appli Deleting i-appli Software list screen(P185)XMove cursor to softwareXM[Menu]X [Delete]XPerform the following operation 䋺 You can delete the selected software. X"Yes" Select 䋺 Select and delete items. X Check off the software to be deleted X I[Delete] X "Yes" All 䋺 Delete all software. XEnter the security codeX"Yes" Note • When setting "Auto start time", a confirmation screen whether or not to delete the settings appears. Select "Yes" to delete. Displaying i-appli Site from i-appli You can connect to a site and use FOMA functions while i-appli is active. • You have to download the related i-appli in advance. • For some i-appli, operations may be different or disabled. Using the Camera from an i-appli • When using the camera from i-appli, captured images will not be saved in the "My picture" in "Data box" but as part of the i-appli. Using the camera from an i-appli Using Barcode Reader from an i-appli • The camera can be used from the i-appli to read a QR code and Japan Article Number code. • The read result can be used and saved by the software. Use the i-appli to read a code Using Infrared Communication from an i-appli Use the i-appli and perform an infrared communication Note • You may not be able to exchange data with some devices even if they have the infrared capability. • According to the infrared transmission, the i-appli may receive activation data, and the i-appli may start. • When the infrared communication is executed and the handset tries to connects to the site and receives mail, the site connection/mail reception will be cancelled. i-appli 191 Data Display/Edit/Management Data Box............................................................................................................................. 194 Making Full Use of Still Images Displaying Images..................................................................................... Picture viewer Viewing Flash Movies ....................................................................................................... Editing Still Images ................................................................................Edit Still Images Creating Animations ........................................................................................Animation 194 197 198 200 Making Full Use of Videos Playing Videos/i-motion Movies ..................................................Video/i-motion Player Editing Videos/i-motion Movies....................................... Edit Videos/i-motion Movies 201 203 Making Full Use of Melodies Playing Melodies ....................................................................................... Melody player 204 Making Full Use of a Memory Card microSD Memory Cards ................................................................................................... Inserting/Removing a microSD Memory Card................................................................ Using a microSD Memory Card ....................................................................................... Copying/Overwriting Personal Information between the FOMA Handset and a microSD Memory Card .................................................................................................... Updating the Data on the microSD Memory Card.......................................................... Checking the Space on the microSD Memory Card ...................................................... Folder Structure on the microSD Memory Card............................................................. Reading/Writing Data on a micro SD Memory Card with the FOMA Handset ............. 206 206 207 208 209 209 210 210 Exchanging Data via Infrared Communication Using Infrared Communication................................................................................. IrDa Exchanging Data One Piece at a Time ............................... Send Ir DA/Receive Ir Data Receiving or Sending All Data ..............................Send All via Ir DA/Receive All Ir DA Using the Infrared Remote Control Function ................................................................. 211 212 212 213 193 Music channel Distributed Program Data Box The Data box contains the items and folders shown in the following table. Data obtained from sites or i-mode mail are saved in folders according to their respective types. • Up to 20 folders can be added to My picture, Music, i-motion, or Melody. Up to 10 folders can be added to the Music channel. • Files saved in My picture, Music, i-motion, or Melody can be moved to other folders within the category. Files saved in the Music channel can be moved from the "Distributed program" folder to another folder within the category, or can be moved between folders other than "Distributed program". Music programs distributed through Music channels i-motion : Videos and i-motion movies, etc. i-mode Videos/i-motion movies obtained from sites or mail Camera Videos captured by the Video Camera Preinstalled Videos provided by default Data transfer Videos, etc. obtained via infrared communication i-motion : Videos and i-motion movies, etc. Videos or i-motion movies saved on the microSD memory card My Pictures : Still images, etc. i-mode Still images, etc. obtained from sites or mail Camera Still images captured by the Camera Deco-mail Pictures Pictures for Deco-mail provided by default Deco-mail pictogram Deco-mail pictograms that are pre-installed by default or downloaded via web sites or mails Preinstalled Still images provided by default Data transfer Still images, etc. obtained via infrared communication Item Still images that can be used for frames or stamps Animation Camera image Still images captured by the Camera Other images Still images, etc. Deco-mail pictogram Pictograms for Deco-mail copied from the FOMA handset Music : Playlists created with music data and the music player Transferable contents Audio Audio only i-motion movies Videos Videos captured by the Video Camera Melody : Melodies, etc. i-mode Melodies, etc. obtained from sites or mail Preinstalled Melodies provided by default Data transfer Melodies, etc. obtained via infrared communication micro SD Melody User defined animations, etc. Still images saved on the microSD memory card micro SD micro SD Copyright protected videos or i-motion movies moved from the FOMA handset Melodies saved on the microSD memory card SD-audio : SD-Audio compatible music saved on the microSD memory card and Playlists created with the SD-Audio Player Picture viewer Displaying Images You can display still images you have captured, or obtained from sites or i-mode mail. 䂓 Available File Formats i-mode Data obtained from the site File Format䋪 JPEG, GIF Playlist Playlists created with the music player Pixels JPEG: Up to 1200 x 1600 pixels Progressive JPEG, GIF: Up to 800x600 pixels micro SD Transferable contents File Size Up to 2MB Music data saved on the microSD memory card File Extension jpg, gif 䋪䋺 Even if a file is in a compatible file format, it may not be displayed depending on the file. 194 Data Display/Edit/Management a M[Menu]X (Data box)X"My picture". Note • An i-mode mail with the selected image attached can be created by pressing I[Mail] on the still image list screen. • Some images not captured with FOMA L705i may not be displayed on the Still image file list screen. My Pictures Screen Move the cursor to a folder XC[Open] Descriptions of Display name, File Name, and Title • I[Switch] : Switch between list and picture display. Still images, Flash movies, videos/i-motion movies, and melodies saved in the FOMA handset have more than one name. Display name File Name Still image file list screen Title* a Display name of the selected file b The type of the selected file 䂓 Icons displayed on the still image file list screen Icon 㶎䋩 䋨 Names appear on a PC or other handsets Names for management of the FOMA L705i (they cannot be edited) 䋪䋺 Still images and Flash movie files do not have titles. Description Display the list screen of the next higher folder Restricted files 䋯 䊂䊷䉺 BOXౝ䈱৻ⷩ↹㕙䉇␜䋯ౣ ↢↹㕙䈪␜䈘 䉏䉎 ฬ⒓ File type (JPEG/GIF) Move the cursor to a file XC[View] Still image display screen a Sequential number/number of saved files Display the sequential number of the current file and the total number of saved files in the folder. b Display name of the file 䂓 Key operations on the still image display screen Sub Menu on the My Pictures Screen My Pictures screen (P195)XMove the cursor to a folderXM[Menzu]X Perform the following operations [Rename] Change the name of the selected folder. Up to 30 fullpitch or half-pitch characters can be entered. XEdit the folder name [New folder] Create a folder. XEnter a folder name • You cannot create a sub folder in a user-defined folder. [Delete] Delete the selected folder. X"Yes" [List view/Grid view] Switch how to display folders. Display the previous/next file [Sort by] Sort folders by setting a condition. X"Name"/"Date"/"Size"/"Source" C[Full] Display a full image, hiding the Soft keys/return to the original display size [Memory info.] Handset 䋺 Display the status of storage space in the memory "Data box". I[Mail] Send the displayed image by mail →P161 External 䋺 Display the status of storage space on the memory microSD memory card. Key Description [Folder property] Display the name of the selected folder and the number of files in the folder. Data Display/Edit/Management Continue on the next page 195 Sub Menu on the Still Image File List Screen Still image file screen (P195) XMove the cursor to a fileXM[Menu]XPerform the following operations [Files] View Edit Move 䋺 Display the selected file. 䋺 Edit the selected file.→P198 䋺 Move the selected file to another folder. XSelect a destination folderXI[Move] Copy 䋺 Copy the selected file to another folder. XSelect a destination folderXI[Copy] Delete 䋺 Delete the selected file. X"Yes" Delete 䋺 Delete all files in the folder. X"Yes"XEnter the security code all Rename䋺 Change the display name of the selected file. XEdit a display name [Multiple choice] Select and delete files. XPlace a check mark next to a file to deleteXI [Delete]X"Yes" • You can move/copy multiple files by performing the following steps: XPlace check marks next to files to move/copy XM[Menu]X"Move"/"Copy"X Select the destination folder*X I[Copy]/[Move] • You can also select "Delete", "Mark", "Mark all", "Unmark", or "Unmark all" by pressing M[Menu]. [File property] Display the file name, size and type, etc. of the selected file.→P197 [Send via]䋪 Mail 䋺 Create i-mode mail with the selected file attached. Go to Step 2 in "Creating and Sending i-mode Mail" (P161). IrDA 䋺 Send a file using Infrared communication. [Set as] Set the selected file as the Stand-by display or Call display Stand-by Display 䋺 Set as the Stand-by display. Voice call display 䋺 Set as a Voice call display. Video call display 䋺 Set as a Video call display. Wake-up display 䋺 Set as the Wake-up display. [List view (Grid view)] Switch how to display folders. 196 Data Display/Edit/Management [Sort by] Sort files by setting a condition. X"Display name"/"Date"/"Size"/"Source" [Memory info.] Handset 䋺 Display the status of storage space in the memory "Data box". External 䋺 Display the status of storage space on the memory microSD memory card. [New folder] Create a folder. XEnter a folder name • You cannot create a sub folder in a user-defined folder. 䋪䋺 Not available for Flash files. Sub Menu on the Still Image Display Screen Still image display screen (P195)XM [Menu]XPerform the following operations [Edit image]䋪 Edit the displayed file.→P198 [Delete 1 item] Delete the displayed file. X"Yes" [Edit title] Edit the name of the displayed file. XEdit a file name [File property] Display the file name, size and type, etc. of the displayed file.→P197 [Send via]䋪 Mail 䋺 Create i-mode mail with the selected file attached. Go to Step 2 in "Creating and Sending i-mode Mail" (P161). IrDA 䋺 Send a file using Infrared communication. [Full screen] Display the entire image, hiding Soft keys, etc. • C/ Q: Restore the full image to the original display. • J: Display the next/previous image. [Zoom] Display an enlarged image. • M[+] : Enlarge the image • I[-] : Restore the previous zoom ratio • K: Move the display position • The entire image and the displayed area appear at the lower right of the screen. [Set as] Set the displayed file as the Stand-by display or Call display. Stand-by Display䋺 Set as the Stand-by display. Voice call display䋺 Set as a Voice call display. Video call display䋺 Set as a Video call display. Wake-up display 䋺 Set as the Wake-up display. [View settings] Set the display method of an image, a zoom ratio, or interval between animation frames.→P197 • The sub menu on the Flash playback screen is the same as the "Sub Menu on the Still Image Display Screen" (P196). However, "Edit image" and "Send via" are not available. Viewing Image Information Still image list screen (P195)/Still image display screen (P195)/Flash playback screen (P197)XM[Menu]X"File property" 䋪䋺 Not available for Flash files. • I[Edit] : Edit properties. 䂓 Information displayed on the File property screen Viewing Flash Movies Item You can view Flash moves downloaded from a site, etc. 䂓 Available File Formats File Format䋪 Flash Pixels 240㬍320䊄 䉾 䊃 એਅ File Size Up to 100KB File Extension swf 䋪䋺 Even a file in a compatible file format may not play depending on the file. M[Menu]X picture" (Data box)X"My Display the file name File Size Display the file size File Type䋪 Display the file format Date & Time (Saved) Display the saved date and time Display size䋪 File Restriction Display the resolution Display whether the file is restricted Source Display the source Move to microSD Indicates whether the file can be moved to a microSD memory card 䋪䋺 Not displayed for a Flash file. Move the cursor to a folder XC[Open] Setting the View of a Still Image Move the cursor to a file XC[View] Default Flash Movie Playback Screen a Sequential number/number of saved files Display the sequential number of the current file and the total number of saved files in the folder. b Display name of the file 䂓 Key operations on the Flash movie playback screen Key View type: Normal Zoom type: Normal Animation interval: Medium Set the display method of an image, a zoom ratio, or interval between animation frames. Description C[Full] Display a full image, hiding the Soft keys/return to the original display size I[Retry] Play a Flash movie from the beginning Play the previous/next file F/E H Increase/decrease the volume Sub Menu on the Flash Playback Screen Description File Name Flash playback screen (P197)XM[Menu] Still image display screen (P195)/Flash playback screen (P197)/Animation list screen (P200)XM[Menu]X"View settings"XPerform the following operations [View type] 䋺 Display the image in its original size. Normal Fit to screen 䋺 Display the image enlarged to fit the screen. [Zoom type] 䋺 Zoom in on an image enlarged to fit the Normal screen. 䋺 Zoom in on an image displayed in its Same magnification original size. [Animation interval] Set the interval between animation frames. X"Slow"/"Medium"/"Fast" I[Done] Data Display/Edit/Management Continue on the next page 197 Restricting Files You can restrict files. A restricted file attached to mail cannot be sent or forwarded from the recipient FOMA handset. Select a file to restrictXM[Menu] X"File property" The File property screen opens. Move the cursor to the "File restriction" fieldXI[Edit]X"File restricted" Note • This option cannot be changed for a file, etc. downloaded from a site. Edit Still Images Editing Still Images You can edit still images. The edited still image is saved in the same folder as the source file. • Only JPEG files can be edited. However, some files may not be edited. • Editing a still image repeatedly may reduce the image quality or increase the file size. Still image display screen (P195)X M[Menu]X"Edit image" [Insert] You can add a frame, stamp, or text. Frame 䋺 Add a frame to an image. Select a folder X Select a frame • After selecting a frame, you can select "Change frame" or "Rotate" by pressing M[Menu]. Stamp 䋺 Add a stamp to an image.→P199 Text 䋺 You can add text to an image.→P199 [Retouch] You can change the brightness, contrast or color tone of an image. Brightness 䋺 Set the brightness of an image. X Press J to adjust the brightness Contrast 䋺 Set the contrast of the image. X Press J to adjust the contrast 䋺 Set the color tone of the image. Color change X Press K to adjust each RGB value Sharpness 䋺 Sharpen the image. X Press J to adjust the sharpness Softness 䋺 Soften the image. X Press J to adjust the softness [Effect] Set special effects for an image. 䋺 Change the image into sepia tone. Sepia Black & White䋺 Change the image into black and white. 䋺 Change the image into negative. Negative 䋺 Select an area and apply mosaic. Mosaic XKSelect start pointXKSelect end point • Press M[Menu] to Change the shape of the area into "Rectangle" or "Circle". [Send via mail] Create i-mode mail with the edited image attached. Still Image Edit Screen M[Menu]XPerform the following operations [Save] Save the edited still image. Go to Step 5. [Rotate] Left 䋺 Rotate the image 90 degrees counterclockwise. Right䋺 Rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise. 180 䋺 Rotate the image 180 degrees. [Mirror] Left/Right 䋺 Flip the image horizontally. Up/Down 䋺 Flip the image vertically. [Resize] You can change the image size.→P199 [Crop] You can cut out a part of an image.→P199 198 Data Display/Edit/Management [Undo] Cancel the performed operation and restore the previous state. C[OK] C[Save] "New file" 䂓 To cancel editing Press I[Cancel]. 䂓 To restore to the previous state Press I[Undo]. 䂓 To overwrite the original file Select "Original file". Note • Frames are in four sizes: CIF (352x288), QVGA (240x320), QCIF (176x144), and Sub QCIF (128x96). • You can only select a frame of the same size as the source image. • A source image larger than 640 x 480 dots cannot be retouched. • An effect cannot be added to a source image larger than 640 x 480 dots or with either side smaller than 8 dots. Changing the Image Size Still image edit screen (P198)XM [Menu]X"Resize" Select an image size C[OK]XSave the still image • Go to Step 4 (P198) in "Editing Still Images". Note • An image cannot be resized when the vertical or horizontal size of the source image is smaller than 8 pixels. • If a size with different proportions than the source is selected, the original proportions will be retained for the resized image. Cropping an Image Still image edit screen (P198)XM [Menu]X"Crop" Select a cropping sizeXUseKto move the frame to the area to be croppedXC[Select] 䂓 When "User define" is selected Use Kto select a starting pointX, Use K to select an ending point to specify the cropping area. C[OK]XSave the still image • Go to Step 4 (P198) in "Editing Still Images". Note • An image cannot be cropped when the vertical or horizontal size of the source image is smaller than 8 pixels. 䂓 To rotate the stamp M[Menu]XSelect from "Rotate"X"Left"/ "Right" and"180". I[Done]XSave the still image • Go to Step 4 (P198) in "Editing Still Images". Note • A Stamp cannot be added to a source image larger than 640 x 480 pixels or with either side smaller than 24 pixels. • Preinstalled Stamps →P292 Pasting Characters You can add text to an image. You can also change the font color or size, rotate the text, or paste speech bubbles. Still image edit screen (P198)XM [Menu]X"Insert"X"Text" Enter the text to paste M[Menu]XModify text [Edit text] Change the pasted text. XEdit the text [Font size] Specify the font size. X"Large"/"Medium"/"Small" [Font color] Change the pasted text color. XSelect a color [Rotate] Rotate the text. X"Left"/"Right"/"180" [Comic] Add a speech bubble. XSelect a speech bubble Use K to specify the location I[Done]XSave the still image • Go to Step 4 (P198) in "Editing Still Images". Note Adding a Stamp Still image edit screen (P198)XM [Menu]X"Insert"X"Stamp" • Text cannot be added an image when the vertical or horizontal size of the source image is smaller than 24 pixels or when the source image size is larger than 640x480. Select a stampXUse K to specify the location 䂓 To add a different stamp M[Menu]X"Change stamp"XSelect a stampX UseK to specify the location. Data Display/Edit/Management Continue on the next page 199 Animation Image File Selection Screen Sub Menu Creating Animations You can create an animation with up to 20 frames using saved still images. • Up to 30 animations can be created. You can perform the following operations from the selection screen to save images: • I[View]䋺 The selected image is displayed. M[Menu]X (Data box)X"My picture"X"Animation" From a screen where an image is selected (P200)XM [Menu] X perform the following operations: 䌛 Select䌝 Add the selected image file to the animation. 䌛 View䌝 Display the selected file. Animation List Screen I[New]XEnter a display name of the file C[Add]XMove the cursor to a folder XC[Open]XSelect an image Selecting an image displays the registered image file name. 䂓 To delete an added image Move the cursor to an image to delete and PressM[Delete]. Repeat Step 3 to save images X I[Done] Viewing Animation Animation list screen(P200)XMove the cursor to an animationXC[View] 䌛 File property䌝 Display the file name, size and type, etc. of the selected file.→P197 䌛 List view/Grid view䌝 Switch the display format of files. 䌛 Sort䌝 Sort files by specifying a condition. X"Display name"/"Date"/"Size"/"Source" 䌛 Memory info.䌝 䋺 Display the status of storage space of Handset the "Data box". memory External memory 䋺 Display the status of storage space of the microSD memory card. Sub Menu on the Animation List Screen Animation list screen (P200)XMove the cursor to an animationXM[Menu]X Perform the following operations [Add images] Add images to the selected animation. [Delete 1 item] Delete the selected animation. X"Yes" Animation display screen 䂓 Key operations while viewing animation Key 200 Description Play the previous/next animation C[Full] Display a fit-to-screen animation, hiding the Soft keys/return to the original display size Data Display/Edit/Management [Edit title] Edit the title of the selected animation. Up to 30 fullpitch or half-pitch characters can be entered. XModify the title [Set as stand-by] Set the selected animation as the Stand-by display. [View settings] Set the display method of an image, a zoom ratio, or interval between animation frames.→P197 c Video/i-motion Player Playing Videos/i-motion Movies Move the cursor to a file XC[Play] • I[Mail] : The Compose message screen with the selected file attached appears. You can play video clips you have captured, or i-motion movies obtained from sites or i-mode mail. 䂓 Available File Formats File Format䋪 MP4 (Mobile MP4) Encoding Method MP4 file 䇭 Graphics: MPEG-4 and H.263 䇭 Audio: AMR and AAC File Extension mp4 and 3gp 䋪䋺 Even a file in a compatible file format may not play depending on the file. M[Menu]X (Data box)X"i-motion" • Go to Step 3 to operate a file displayed on the i-motion movie screen. Key i-motion Movie Screen • For icons displayed on the screen, see Step 2 in "Displaying Images" (P195). i-motion Movie Playback Screen a Playback progress bar Shows the playback elapsed time. b Display name of the file c Volume d Control Key Indicates available navigation keys. e Playback elapsed time/Maximum playback time 䂓 Key operations on the i-motion playback screen Description Pause/Play Move the cursor to a folder XC[Open] Play the previous/next file While being pressed, rewinds the movie/sound (Hold down) (Hold down) While being pressed, fast forwards the movie/sound F/E H Adjust the volume When the ticker has highlighted text After i-motion playback ends, a confirmation screen opens asking whether to use Phone To/AV Phone To/Web To/Mail To. Press M [Yes]. • If you wish to use one of these functions during i-motion playback, press C/U/FXC. i-motion File list screen Sub Menu on the i-motion Screen i-motion screen (P201)XMove the cursor to a folderXM[Menu] • The sub menu of the i-motion screen is the same as the "sub menu on the My Pictures Screen" (P195). Sub Menu on the i-motion File List Screen i-motion file list screen (P201)XMove the cursor to a fileXM[Menu]X Perform the following operations Data Display/Edit/Management Continue on the next page 201 [Files] Play Move 䋺 Play the selected file. 䋺 Move the selected file to another folder. XSelect a destination folderXI[Move] 䋺 Copy the selected file to another folder. Copy XSelect a destination folderXI[Copy] Delete 䋺 Delete the selected file. X"Yes" Delete all䋺 Delete all files in the folder. XEnter the security code X"Yes" Rename 䋺 Change the display name of the selected file. XEdit a display name of the file 䋺 Restore the default title of the file from the Reset name selected file name. [Multiple choice] Select and delete files. XSelect files to deleteXI[Delete]X"Yes" • You can move/copy multiple files by performing the following steps: XPlace check marks next to files to move/copy XM[Menu]X"Move""/"Copy"XSelect the destination folder*X I[Copy]/[Move] 䋪䋺 Select the destination from "Handset memory" (FOMA handset) and "Movablecontents" (microSD memory card). You can view another folder by pressing C[Open]. • You can also select "Delete", "Mark", "Mark all", "Unmark", or "Unmark all" by pressing M[Menu]. [File property] Display the file name, size and type, etc. of the selected file.→P203 [Send via] Mail 䋺 Create i-mode mail with the selected file attached. Go to Step 2 in "Creating and Sending i-mode Mail" (P161). IrDA 䋺 Send a file using Infrared communication. [Set as ringtone] Set the selected file as a ring tone, etc. Voice ring tone 䋺 Set as a ring tone for a voice call. Video ring tone 䋺 Set as a ring tone for a video call. 䋺 Set as a ring tone for mail. Mail tone Message R tone䋺 Set as a ring tone for Message R. Message F tone 䋺 Set as a ring tone for Message F. 䋺 Set as a ring tone for SMS. SMS tone 䋺 Set as an alarm tone. Alarm tone 202 Data Display/Edit/Management [Set as display] Set the selected file as the Stand-by display or Call display Stand-by display 䋺 Set as the Stand-by display. Voice call display 䋺 Set as a Voice call display. Video call display 䋺 Set as a Video call display. Wake-up display 䋺 Set as the Wake-up display. [List view (Grid view)] Switch how to display files. [Sort by] Sort folders by setting a condition. X"Display name"/"Date"/"Size"/"Source" [Memory info.] Handset 䋺 Display the status of storage space in the memory "Data box". External 䋺 Display the status of storage space on the memory microSD memory card. [New folder] Create a folder. XEnter a folder name • You cannot create a sub folder in a user-defined folder. Sub Menu on the i-motion Playback Screen i-motion playback screen (P201)XM [Menu]XPerform the following operations [Play] Play an i-motion movie. [Send via mail] Create i-mode mail with the selected file attached. Go to Step 2 in "Creating and Sending i-mode Mail" (P161). [Set as ringtone] Set the file in playback as a ring tone. Voice ring tone 䋺 Set as a ring tone for a voice call. Video ring tone 䋺 Set as a ring tone for a video call. 䋺 Set as a ring tone for mail. Mail tone Message R tone䋺 Set as a ring tone for Message R. Message F tone 䋺 Set as a ring tone for Message F. 䋺 Set as a ring tone for SMS. SMS tone 䋺 Set as an alarm tone. Alarm tone [Set as display] Set the selected file as the Stand-by display or Call display Stand-by Display 䋺 Set as the Stand-by display. Voice call display 䋺 Set as a Voice call display. Video call display 䋺 Set as a Video call display. Wake-up display 䋺 Set as the Wake-up display. [Expand] Display a fit-to-screen video/i-motion movie, hiding Soft keys, etc. • Press Q to restore its original display size. [Mute (Unmute)] Mute or unmute the sound. [Edit] Edit the video/i-motion in playback.→P203 [File property] Display the file name, size and type, etc. of the file in playback.→P203 Item Display information of replays/ expiration date/file period Set as tone Display whether the file can be set as a ring tone Call display Display whether the file can be set as the Stand-by display or Call display Title Display the default title of the file Creator Display creator information Copyright Display copyright information Description Display the file description Source Display the source Move to microSD Indicates whether the file can be moved to a microSD memory card Edit Videos/i-motion Movies Editing Videos/i-motion Movies Note • While the sub menu is accessed, a video/ i-motion movie playback is paused. • The following videos/i-motion movies cannot be set as a Chaku-motion or Call display: - Files that were sent to a PC or another FOMA handset via Infrared communication or Data Link Software and sent back to the FOMA handset. - The videos/i-motion movies that were copied or moved from the microSD memory card to the FOMA handset, including those copied or moved from the handset to the microSD memory card and copied or moved back to the handset. (except i-motion movies that support contents migration.) Viewing Video/i-motion Movie Information i-motion file list screen (P201)/i-motion playback screen (P201)XM[Menu] X"File property" • I[Edit] : Edit properties. 䂓 Information displayed on the File detail screen Item Description Replays/ Expiration date/File period You can edit videos/i-motion movies. The edited video/i-motion movie is saved in the same folder as the source file. • The preinstalled files cannot be edited. • Some files may not be edited. • The Ticker displayed on i-motion movies cannot be edited. Extracting a Frame of a Video as a Still Image You can extract a still image from a video/i-motion movie. The extracted image is saved in the "Camera" folder in "My picture" in the Data box. i-motion playback screen (P201)X Display the image to be extracted as a still image • Operations during i-motion playback →P201 M[Menu]X"Edit"X"Capture" Extracting a Video Description File Name Display the file name You can extract a part of a video/i-motion movie. File Size Display the file size File Type Display the file format Date & Time (Saved) Display the saved date and time Playing time Display the file playback duration Display size Display the resolution Audio Display the sound format File Restriction Display whether the file is restricted →P198 i-motion playback screen (P201)XM [Menu]X"Edit"X"Clipping"XPerform the following operations [500KB] Extract the video beyond the selected starting point to 500KB or smaller and save it. XPressC to play a video/i-motion movieXAt the starting point to clipM[Start] Data Display/Edit/Management Continue on the next page 203 [2MB] Extract the video beyond the selected start point to 2MB or smaller and save it. XPressC to play a video/i-motion movieXAt the starting point to clipM[Start] [Bound] Crop and save the video from the selected starting point to the ending point. XPress C to play a video/i-motionXAt the start point to clipM[Start]XAt the end point to clipM[Done] a Playback progress bar Shows the playback elapsed time. b Display name of the file c Volume d Control Key Indicates available navigation keys. e Playback elapsed time/Maximum playback time 䂓 Key operations on the Melody playback screen Key Description Pause/Play Melody player Play the previous/next file Playing Melodies F/E H Adjust the volume You can play pre-installed melodies or melodies downloaded from sites. 䂓 Available File Formats File Format䋪 SMF and MFi File Extension mid and mld Sub Menu on the Melody Screen • The sub menu of the Melody screen is the same as "Sub Menu on the My Pictures Screen" (P195). 䋪䋺 Even a file in a compatible file format may not play depending on the file. M[Menu]X Melody screen (P204)XMove the cursor to a folderXM[Menu] (Data box)X"Melody" Sub Menu on the Melody File List Screen Melody file list screen (P204)XMove the cursor to a fileXM[Menu]X Perform the following operations [Files] Play Move Move the cursor to a folder XC[Open] Melody Screen • For icons displayed on the screen, see Step 2 in "Displaying Images" Melody File List Screen 204 Move the cursor to a file XC[Play] • I[Mail] : The Compose message screen with the selected file attached appears. Data Display/Edit/Management Melody Playback Screen 䋺 Play the selected file. 䋺 Move the selected file to another folder. XSelect a destination folderXI[Move] 䋺 Copy the selected file to another folder. Copy XSelect a destination folderXI[Copy] Delete 䋺 Delete the selected file. X"Yes" Delete all 䋺 Delete all files in the folder. XEnter the security codeX"Yes" Rename 䋺 Change the display name of the selected file. XEdit a display name of the file 䋺 Play the selected file. Reset name [Multiple choice] Select and delete files. XPlace a check mark next to a file to deleteXI [Delete]X"Yes" • You can move/copy multiple files by performing the following steps: XPlace check marks next to files to move/copy XM[Menu]X"Move"/"Copy"XSelect the destination folder*X I[Copy]/[Move] *䋺 Select the destination from "Handset memory" (FOMA handset) and "Movablecontents" (microSD memory card). You can view another folder by pressing C[Open]. • You can also select "Delete", "Mark", "Mark all", "Unmark", or "Unmark all" by pressing M[Menu]. [File property] Display the name, size and type, etc. of the selected melody.→P205 [Send via] Mail䋺 Create i-mode mail with the selected melody attached. Go to Step 2 in "Creating and Sending i-mode Mail" (P161). IrDA䋺 Send a file using Infrared communication. [Set as] Set the selected melody as a ring tone, etc. Voice ring tone 䋺 Set as a ring tone for a voice call. Video ring tone 䋺 Set as a ring tone for a video call. 䋺 Set as a ring tone for mail. Mail tone Message R tone 䋺 Set as a ring tone for Message R. Message F tone 䋺 Set as a ring tone for Message F. 䋺 Set as a ring tone for SMS. SMS tone 䋺 Set as an alarm tone. Alarm tone [Set as] Set the melody in playback as a ring tone. Voice ring tone 䋺 Set as a ring tone for a voice call. Video ring tone 䋺 Set as a ring tone for a video call. 䋺 Set as a ring tone for mail. Mail tone Message R tone 䋺 Set as a ring tone for Message R. Message F tone 䋺 Set as a ring tone for Message F. 䋺 Set as a ring tone for SMS. SMS tone 䋺 Set as an alarm tone. Alarm tone [Mute (Unmute)] Mute or unmute the sound. [File property] Display the file name, size and type, etc. of the melody in playback.→P205 Note • While the sub menu is accessed, the melody playback is paused. [Sort by] Sort files by setting a condition. X"Display name"/"Date"/"Size"/"Source" [Memory info.] Handset 䋺 Display the status of storage space in the "Data box". memory External 䋺 Display the status of storage space on the microSD memory card. memory Viewing Melody Information Melody file list screen (P204)/Melody playback screen (P204)XM[Menu] X"File property" • I[Edit] : Edit properties. [New folder] Create a folder. XEnter a folder name • You cannot create a sub folder in a user-defined folder. Sub Menu on the Melody Playback Screen Melody playback screen (P204)XM [Menu]XPerform the following operations [Send via mail] Create i-mode mail with the melody in playback attached. Go to Step 2 in "Creating and Sending i-mode Mail" (P161). 䂓 Information displayed on the File detail screen Item Description File Name Display the file name File Size Display the file size File Type Display the file format Date & Time (Saved) Display the saved date and time Playing time Display the file playback duration File Restriction Display whether the file is restricted →P198 Set as tone Display whether the file can be set as a ring tone Title Display the default title of the file Source Display the source Move to microSD Indicates whether the file can be moved to a microSD memory card Data Display/Edit/Management 205 microSD Memory Cards You can save data on the FOMA handset such as Phonebook entries, Mail messages, or Bookmarks to a microSD memory card, or can read data on a microSD memory card to the FOMA handset. Also, you can browse data on a microSD memory card from the FOMA handset. • FOMA L705i supports commercially available microSD memory cards up to 2 GB (as of 䃂 2007). For the latest verified information on operations of microSD memory cards, including manufacturers and size of cards, visit the following site. A microSD memory card not listed at the site may not function. - From i-mode "iMenu"X"䊜 䊆䊠 䊷䋯ᬌ⚝ (Menu/ Search)"X"䉬 䊷䉺 䉟 㔚䊜 䊷䉦 䊷 (Mobile Phone Manufacturers)"X"WOW LG" - From a PC http://www.jp.lgmobile.com/ Note that the information on the site shows results of compatibility checks. However, the results of the checks are not guaranteed. QR Code to • You can purchase microSD Access a Site memory cards and microSD memory card adapters from electric appliance stores, etc. Cautions on Using microSD Memory Cards • microSD memory cards formatted by another device such as a PC may not be usable on the FOMA handset. Use microSD memory cards formatted by the FOMA L705i handset.→P207 • microSD memory cards may lose data or deform due to an accident or failure of the handset. It is recommended that you make a copy of important data and keep it in a separate place. DoCoMo is not responsible for loss or alteration of data. • It may take a while to communicate depending on the amount of data to transfer. Also, the data may not be copied. • Do not turn the handset power off while data is being read or written. • Do not unplug the FOMA USB cable (optional) while data is being read or written, or a microSD is being formatted. Unplugging the cable may result in data loss. • Never remove the microSD memory card while the card is being accessed such as when data from the card is being displayed or the storage capacity of the card is being checked. • Do not attach labels or stickers on microSD memory cards. Even the thickness of labels may cause contact failure or data corruption. • Do not touch the contacts with your hand or metal objects. • Do not apply strong force, do not bend or drop, and do not let the card become wet. • Do not leave a removed microSD memory card within the reach of small infants. .Accidental swallowing or injury may result. • When inserting/removing the microSD memory card, do not place your face close to the card because the card may suddenly eject when you release your fingers. Also, do not let small children handle the card. Injury may result. • Do not use or store the card in the following places: - In extremely high temperatures such as inside a very hot car or under scorching heat - In direct sunlight - In an environment with high humidity or corrosive substances - In a place where it can be affected by static electricity or electrical noise Inserting/Removing a microSD Memory Card • Turn the FOMA handset power off before inserting/ removing the microSD memory card. Inserting Open the microSD memory card slot cover (a) and carefully insert the card with the marked side up in the direction of the arrow buntil the card clicks into place Close the microSD memory card slot cover (c) Note • Insert the microSD memory card correctly. If the card is not inserted correctly, the card cannot be used. Removing Open the microSD memory card slot cover (c) and lightly push the card in the direction of the arrow b The microSD memory card ejects a little. 206 Data Display/Edit/Management b Pull the microSD memory card straight out in the direction of the arrow c and close the slot cover (d) Viewing/Playing Files on the microSD Memory Card You can view/play files on the memory card in the same way as ones on the FOMA handset using the "Data box". M[Menu]X (Data box)X"My picture"/"i-motion"/"Melody"X "microSD" • "Displaying Images" →P194 • "Playing Videos/i-motion Movies" →P201 • "Playing Melodies" →P204 Note • Do not use excessive force to pull out the microSD memory card. Using a microSD Memory Card You can move or copy files saved in the Data box on the FOMA handset, such as still images, video clips or i-motion movies, to the microSD memory card, and you can view files saved from a PC to the microSD memory card on the FOMA handset. Formatting a microSD Memory Card Format (initialize) a microSD memory card so that it can be used for the FOMA handset. M[Menu]X (Lifekit)X"microSD card"X"Reset microSD card" A warning indicating all data will be deleted appears. Select whether you want to continue to format. "Yes" X Enter the security code Note • In order to use a microSD memory card with this FOMA handset, use this handset to format the card. • Formatting a microSD memory card deletes all saved files on the card. Do not lose important data by mistake. • Voice/video calls cannot be received while formatting. Note • Some files may not be viewed/played. • The sub menu on the folder/file list screen for a microSD memory card is the same as one for the FOMA handset. However, "Sort by", "Set as", and transfer via infrared communication are not available. Copying/Moving Files between the FOMA Handset and a Memory Card You can copy or move files between the FOMA handset and a microSD memory card by copying or moving files between the "micro SD" folder in Data box and another folder. Example: To move a still image saved on the FOMA handset to a microSD memory card M[Menu]X picture" (Data box)X"My Move the cursor to a folder XC [Open] • Select a folder other than "micro SD" folder. Move the cursor to a fileXM[Menu] X"Files"X"Move" Move the cursor onto the target folder X C[Open] X I[Move] Note • Some files may not be copied/moved. • Flash saved on the FOMA handset cannot be copied/moved to a microSD memory card. • You can move transferable copyright protected i-motion movies or songs saved in the FOMA handset to a "Movablecontents" folder in each "microSD" folder. Data Display/Edit/Management Continue on the next page 207 b Copying/Overwriting Personal Information between the FOMA Handset and a microSD Memory Card You can copy or overwrite personal information between the FOMA handset and a microSD memory card. Personal information includes the following: - Phonebook - Schedule - Memos - To Do - Received mail - Sent mail - Unsent mail - Bookmarks Select a data type Data saved on the microSD memory card is displayed. Personal Data List Screen (Example: Phonebook) 䂓 Icons displayed on the PIM data list screen Icon Copying Personal Information from the FOMA Handset to a microSD Memory Card You can copy personal information saved on the FOMA handset to a microSD memory card. Copying Data One Piece at a Time Example: Copying a Phonebook entry UXSelect a Phonebook entry to copy XM[Menu]X"Copy"X"to microSD" M[Menu]X card"X"PIM" I[Backup]XSelect a data type to copy 䂓 For Phonebook A message appears to confirm whether to copy "Own number" data. X"Yes"/"No" Copying Personal Information from a microSD Memory Card to the FOMA Handset You can copy personal information saved on a microSD memory card to the FOMA handset. Copying Data One Piece at a Time 208 M[Menu]X card"X"PIM" (Lifekit)X"microSD Data Display/Edit/Management 䋯 䋯 Phonebook/Schedule/ Memo/To Do/Received mail/Sent mail/Unsent mail/ Bookmark 䋯 䋯 䋯 䋯 䋯 䋯 䋯 Backup data (multiple pieces of data) Phonebook/Schedule/ Memo/To Do/Received mail/Sent mail/Unsent mail/ Bookmark Move the cursor to data XM[Menu] • C[Select] : Display details about data. "Copy to phone"X"Yes" 䂓 For backup data "Copy to phone"XEnter the security code XSelect "Yes". • In step 3, select backup dataXmove the cursor to dataXMpress [Menu] to be able to select "Copy to phone" or "Overwrite to phone". If you select "Copy to phone", you can further select "Selected data" or Send all". (Lifekit)X"microSD Enter the security codeX"Yes" 䋯 䋯 Note Selecting a Data Type to Make a Backup(Backup) Description 䋯 䋯 䋯 Sub Menu on the Personal Data List Screen Personal data list screen (P208)XMove the cursor to dataXM[Menu]X Perform the following operations [Rename]䋪 Change the name of the selected piece of data. XEdit the name of the data [Copy to microSD card] Copy (backup) all data of the displayed data type in a batch from the FOMA handset to a microSD memory card. XEnter the security codeX"Yes" • When copying a phonebook, a message appears to confirm whether to copy "Own number" data. XSelect "Yes" or "No" [Copy to phone]䋪 Copy the selected data to the FOMA handset. X"Yes" • To make a backup, "Copy to phone"XEnter the security codeXSelect "Yes". [Overwrite to phone]䋪 Overwrite the data on the FOMA handset with the selected data. →P209 [Multiple choice]䋪 Select and delete data. XPlace a check mark next to data to deleteXI [Delete]X"Yes" • Press M[Menu] to select "Mark/Unmark", "Delete", "Copy to phone", "Mark all", or "Unmark all" from "Select"/"Release sel". Updating the Data on the microSD Memory Card Update the data on the microSD memory card if the data cannot be displayed correctly on the FOMA handset after changing, adding or deleting data on the microSD memory card using another device. [Delete]䋪 Delete the selected data. X"Yes" M[Menu]X "Data update" (Lifekit)X"microSD"X Place a check mark next to a data type to updateXI[Done] Note • Updating data may take a while if a large amount of data is saved on the microSD memory card. • If you use another device to save data on the microSD memory card, the data saved on the card may not be displayed correctly on the FOMA handset due to insufficient available memory space for managing data on the handset. [Memory Info] Display the status of storage space on the microSD memory card. 䋪䋺 No information is displayed if there is no data on the microSD memory card. Overwriting with Backup Data You can overwrite the data on the FOMA handset with data backed up in advance. • Note that selecting "Overwrite to phone" deletes the saved data on the FOMA handset and replaces it with the selected data from the microSD memory card. Make sure important data is not saved before selecting "Overwrite to phone". Personal data list screen (P208)XMove the cursor to dataXM[Menu]X "Overwrite to phone" Enter the security codeX"Yes" 䂓 For Phonebook A message appears to confirm whether to copy "Own number" data. X"Yes"/"No" Checking the Space on the microSD Memory Card Display the status of storage space on the microSD memory card. M[Menu]X (Lifekit)X"microSD"X "Memory info." Note • If the used space is not shown as "0KB" when no data is saved on the microSD memory card, format the card. • The actual available space on a microSD memory card is smaller than the space printed on the card. • Data may not be saved if there is not sufficient available space on the microSD memory card. Delete unnecessary data or insert a microSD memory card with sufficient available space to save the data. Data Display/Edit/Management Continue on the next page 209 Folder Structure on the microSD Memory Card When you first move or copy files from the FOMA handset to the microSD memory card, or when you first save still images or video clips captured with the Camera directly to the microSD memory card, a folder compatible with the appropriate file type will be automatically created on the microSD memory card. • When you are writing files to the microSD memory card from a PC, a folder structure like the following is required: 䋪2䋺 The data is encoded and cannot be viewed directly on the PC.Do not delete, edit, or add files with these folders.If you do so, the files may not work properly on the FOMA L705i handset. 䂓 Number of items that can be saved on a microSD memory card • The number of files that can be saved on the microSD memory card varies depending on the size of the microSD memory card. • You can check the available space on the microSD memory card by accessing "Memory info." or "Memory status".→P209, P245 File Still images (DCFcompliant-JPEG, GIF other than animations) Still images (nonDCF-compliantJPEG, GIF animations) Melodies Folder DCIM STILL RINGER Sound only videos/ MMFILE i-motion movies Deco-mail pictograms DECOIMG Videos/i-motion movies SD_VIDEO Personal data SD_PIM Capacity Up to 999 folders/Up to 999 files per folder Up to 999 folders/Up to 999 files per folder Up to 999 folders/Up to 999 files per folder Up to 999 folders/Up to 999 files per folder Up to 999 folders/Up to 999 files per folder Up to 999 folders/Up to 999 files per folder One folder/ 65535 files Note • A microSD card used with this FOMA handset cannot be used with other FOMA handsets that support microSD memory card because the folder structure is different. • Depending on the PC, folder names or files names may appear in lower case.Also, file extensions or certain folders (hidden folders) may not appear. • Do not delete or move folders on the microSD memory card using a PC.If you do so, the folders may no longer be readable by the FOMA L705i handset. • x: Represents half-pitch alphanumeric characters • a: Represents half-pitch numeric characters between 0 and 9 䋪1䋺 The "TABLE" folder has sub folders that contain additional files of the types "DCIM", "STILL", "RINGER", "MMFILE", "DECOIMG", and "SD_VIDEO". 210 Data Display/Edit/Management Reading/Writing Data on a micro SD Memory Card with the FOMA Handset Connect the FOMA handset with a microSD memory card inserted to a PC and read data from/ write data to the microSD memory card. • To use a microSD memory card, you need an optional microSD memory card. • Only a PC with Windows Vista, XP, or 2000 (Japanese versions) can be used to read from/write to a microSD memory card. Operation under another OS is not guaranteed. • In order to use the FOMA handset to read from/write to the microSD memory card, you need to set up the USB mode. Disconnect the FOMA USB cable (optional) before setting the USB mode. M[Menu] X (Settings) X "Others" X "USB mode setting" X "microSD mode" Open the External Connector Terminal cover of the handset (a) and insert the external connector of the FOMA USB cable with the label side up until it clicks into its place (b) Insert the USB connector of the USB cable to a USB port on the PC (c) USB䉮 䊈䉪 䉺 䊥 䊥 䊷䉴 䊗䉺 䊮 ᄖㇱធ⛯䉮 䊈䉪 䉺 䋨 䊤 䊔䊦㕙䈏䋩 䊥 䊥 䊷䉴 䊗䉺 䊮 Note • When removing the microSD memory card or the FOMA USB Cable from a PC, be sure to perform the steps to "safely remove hardware" from the task tray of the PC. Removing the memory card or FOMA USB Cable without performing the proper steps may result in data loss. • When switching to USB mode, first disconnect the FOMA USB Cable, then switch the USB mode. When the FOMA handset and the FOMA USB Cable are connected, the USB mode cannot be switched. • If the FOMA USB cable is disconnected, the USB mode automatically returns to "Communication mode". 䂓 Information Verify that the handset is correctly connected to the PC. If it is not connected correctly, data may not only fail to be exchanged but may also be lost. IrDa Using Infrared Communication You can exchange Phonebook entries, Schedule events or Bookmarks with a device equipped with infrared communication capabilities. 䂓 Available Data for Data Transfer Data type Receiving capability Sending capabilit Number of pieces to be stored All All Phonebook (Personal info) 䂾 䂾 䂾 䂾 See P76 Schedule 䂾 䂾 䂾 䂾 Up to 200 To Do䋪1 䂾 䂾 䂾 䂾 Up to 50 Received mail 䂾 䂾 䂾 䂾 Up to 1000 Sent mail 䂾 䂾 䂾 䂾 Unsent mail 䂾 䂾 䂾 䂾 Up to 500 Image files䋪2 䂾 㬍 䂾 㬍 Up to 1000 Videos䋪2 䂾 㬍 䂾 㬍 Up to 1000 Melodies䋪3 䂾 㬍 䂾 㬍 Up to 1000 Bookmarks䋪4 Memos 䂾 䂾 䂾 䂾 Up to 100 䂾 䂾 䂾 䂾 Up to 50 䋪1䋺 Received To Do with the alarm set prior to the set time may not be correctly saved. 䋪2䋺 Up to 2 MB of data per file can be sent or received. 䋪3䋺 Up to 100 KB of data per file can be sent or received. 䋪4䋺 Received Bookmarks may not be filtered depending on the other party's handset model. 䂓 Saving destination of data received via Infrared Data type Storage Location Phonebook Phonebook Schedule Schedule To Do Schedule Received mail Inbox Sent mail Outbox Unsent mail Unsentmessage Still images "Data transfer" folder in "My picture" in "Data box" Videos "Data transfer" folder in "i-motion" in "Data box" Melody "Data transfer" folder in "Melody" in "Data box" Bookmarks "Bookmark" folder Memos Memos Data Display/Edit/Management 211 Send Ir DA/Receive Ir Data Performing Infrared Communication • Use the infrared devices within a distance of approximately 20 cm. • Do not move the FOMA handset until the data exchange completes. • If you hold the FOMA handset in your hand, be sure to hold it securely, so that it does not shake. Infrared Port 15 degrees Exchanging Data One Piece at a Time Sending Data One Piece at a Time • Set the receiving device to the infrared receiving mode before sending data. Example: Sending one Phonebook entry "Stand-by displayXUXMove the cursor to a phonebook entryXM [Menu]X"Send Ir data"X"Focused data"X"Yes 15 degrees Note • A message appears if the destination cannot be found. Verify the distance and angle with the other side. Within approximately 20 cm Cautions on Data Transfer • Calls, i-mode, and data transfer are not available during infrared communication because the handset is in the same status as out of service area. • Data may not be transferred depending on the other party's FOMA handset conditions. Depending on the other party's handset model, the filter setting of received mail or Bookmarks, or category setting of Phonebook entries may not be reflected, or the content of Deco-mail may not be saved correctly. • Infrared communication between a FOMA handset and a non-FOMA deviceL705i may result in data not being received or displayed correctly. • Communication may take a while depending on the amount of data to be transferred. Also, the data may not be received. • Communications may not be performed successfully under direct sunlight, directly under a fluorescent light, or near another infrared device, due to possible interference. • If an i-mode mail message has attached data, the data will not be quoted. • Attachments to i-mode mail are also forwarded. However, some types of attachments may not be forwarded. • When a message text contains pictographs (E-Moji) or symbols, they may not be displayed correctly on a recipient handset or PC that is not capable of displaying them. • Infrared communication is not available when Lock all, Data access lock is set, or when Self Mode is activated. • When any other function is running, infrared communication is not available. • Large size mail may not be sent correctly. • Only downloaded attachments are forwarded when the mail is forwarded. 212 Data Display/Edit/Management Receiving Data One Piece at a Time M[Menu]X (Lifekit)X"Receive Ir Data"X"Receive"X"Yes" Perform the infrared transmission operation on the sending device Start the infrared communication. "Yes" Send All via Ir DA/Receive All Ir DA Receiving or Sending All Data You can exchange all data in a batch with a PC or another FOMA handset. • To exchange all data, a session code is used to identify the sender and receiver correctly. The session code is any 1 to 4-digit number and should be entered both in the sending and receiving devices before sending/receiving data. Sending All Data • Set the receiving device to the infrared receiving mode before sending data. Example: Sending all Phonebook entries on the FOMA handset Stand-by displayUXM[Menu] X"Send Ir data"X"all in phone" If the Phonebook entry has an image set, a warning indicating that it may take a while to send is displayed. Select "Yes" to send. b Enter the security codeXEnter the session codeX"Yes" Start the infrared communication. Note • A message appears if the destination cannot be found. Verify the distance and angle with the other side. • Files in "My picture" cannot be sent as a batch (one file can be sent at a time). ReceivingAll Data • Receiving all data overwrites the data on the FOMA handset and deletes all saved data including protected mail. Verify that important data has been saved elsewhere before sending or receiving all data. M[Menu]X (Lifekit)X"Receive Ir Data"X"Receive all"X"Yes" Infrared Remote Control Operations Hold the FOMA handset within approx. 4 meters of, and with the Infrared Port pointed directly at the remote control sensor of a TV, etc. to operate. Depending on the controlled device and ambient brightness, remote control may not be possible. From the center Within +/- 15 degrees within approx. 4 meters Infrared Port Enter the security codeXEnter the session code Perform the infrared transmission operation on the sending device Start the infrared communication. "Yes" Using the Infrared Remote Control Function You can use the FOMA handset as a remote controller for infrared remote controlled devices. An i-appli can send remote control signals using the infrared port. • In order to use the handset as a remote control for a device, you need to download software that is specifically designed for the device. Key operations for remote control vary depending on the software. • Some devices may not be controlled. • Depending on the controlled device or ambient brightness, communications may not be possible. • When Self-mode is activated, the infrared remote controller cannot be used. Data Display/Edit/Management 213 Music Playback Music channel Music Channel................................................................................................................... Specifying Programs ........................................................................................................ Playing Programs.............................................................................................................. Operating the Music Channel from the Data box........................................................... 216 216 217 219 Music Player Available Players............................................................................................................... Music Player/SD Audio Player ......................................................................................... Saving Music ..................................................................................................................... Playing Music .................................................................................................................... Using Playlist..................................................................................................................... Playing Songs with the SD-Audio Player........................................................................ Playing songs for Special Times or Environments. ...................................................... Using Other Applications While Listening to Music............. Playback in background 220 220 220 221 224 227 228 228 215 Music Channel Specifying Programs The Music channel is a service that automatically downloads specified music programs at night for as much as one hour. The programs are updated regularly. You can enjoy listening to the programs at any time, such as while commuting. Select the programs beforehand i-mode center Specified programs are downloaded automatically at night. • Up to two programs can be specified. • You need to register My Menu to a site that provides Music channel programs.→P141 M[Menu]X channel" (MUSIC)X"Music Receive the programs at night Handsets that support Music Channel Program info. Music Channel Screen IP (Information Provider) • The Music channel is a fee-based service requiring a separate subscription (an i-mode and Pake-Houdai/Pake-Hodai Full contract is necessary for subscription). • In addition to the usage fee for the Music channel, some programs may require additional information fees. • For precautions and details on using the Music channel service, refer to the "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]". • After you subscribe to the Music channel, if you insert the UIM into a FOMA handset that does not support the Music channel, the service is not available. However, service charges will still apply unless you cancel the Music channel subscription. • You cannot specify or download programs while using the international roaming service. When you go overseas, deactivate the program download before you leave Japan. When you come back to Japan, resume the program download (packet communication charges apply if programs are downloaded or specified during international roaming. Pake-Hodai or Pake-Hodai Full is not available overseas). 䂓Information Saved programs may be lost due to failure or repair of the FOMA handset or if the handset is exchanged. Note that DoCoMo is not responsible for lost data. 216 Music Playback "Program setting" Follow the instructions on the screen to specify programs • No programs are specified by default. After programs are specified, the program titles appear. • For details, refer to the "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]". Note • In order to specify programs with another UIM inserted, first check the program setting information from Program setting. Checking the Program setting information may delete the programs that have not been moved from "Distributed Program" folder. • This is a fee-based service requiring a separate subscription. If you have not subscribed to the service, a message indicating that you have not subscribed to the Music channel appears. • Selecting the "Program list" on the Music channel screen opens the list of all programs offered for the Music channel. Selecting "What's Music Channel?" displays how to use the service and any special cautions. Also, you can subscribe to the service. Viewing or Canceling Program Setting Music channel screen (P209)X "Program setting" Follow the instructions on the screen. • For details, refer to the "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]". Note Note • Canceling programs does not remove the My Menu registration. • If you download from the Music channel program list in the Data box, select a program that has failed to downloadXSelect "Yes". • Even if the download was interrupted, the program can be played up to the chapter downloaded before the interruption. • Programs exceeding the number of Replays, Expiration date, or File period cannot be downloaded manually. • Depending on the time frame, it may not be possible to download manually. After Specifying Programs • appears on the Stand-by display 12 hours prior to the program download. • Programs are automatically downloaded at the designated download time. • Programs are downloaded automatically at night. appears on the Stand-by display when the download has been successful, and appears on the Stand-by display when the download has failed. Once the Music channel screen is opened, the icon disappears. Playing Programs Note • If the download is interrupted because the handset is out of service area or the communication is disconnected, the download resumes automatically after three minutes. An attempt to download will be made up to five times. • If the programs are not downloaded at the download time because the handset is not turned on, the handset is out of service area, or the signal is weak, the programs will be downloaded again at the same time the following night. • Programs cannot be automatically downloaded in the following cases. In each case, specify the programs again on the Music channel screen. - If a different UIM is inserted after programs were specified - If the UIM is inserted in another FOMA handset that supports the Music channel after programs were specified - If "Clear memory" is performed on the FOMA handset • It may take a while to download programs. Verify that the battery level is sufficient and signal reception is strong. • Downloaded programs are stored temporarily in the "Distributed program" folder in the Music channel of the Data box. If any channel of the programs is updated, the programs stored in the "Distributed program" folder are deleted and the programs can no longer be played. The programs you want to keep should be moved to another folder.→P219 However, some programs may not be saved. • If you specify new programs, cancel a program, or cancel the subscription to My menu, Music channel, or i-mode, the programs that have not been moved from "Distributed Program" folder are deleted. However, if you specify new programs when the download is deactivated, programs are not deleted. • The ring tone does not sound and the handset does not vibrate when the program download starts or completes. Also, the Call Indicator does not light/blink. Downloading Programs Manually If the download fails, download remaining programs manually. Music channel screen (P209)XSelect a programX"Yes" • 䃨 appears next to each program that was not downloaded. Music channel screen (P209)XSelect a programm Ex: When the player skin is "Chocolate Melody" a Volume b Program/chapter title or the artist name c Playback elapsed time/Progress bar/ Maximum playback time d Equalizer setting e Shows the playback elapsed time. f Chapter image or program image g Playback status h Repeat setting 䂓 Key operations on the Music channel player screen Key Description Pause/Play H F/E Adjust the volume L/R Play from the beginning of the current chapter or go to the previous chapter/ play the next chapter L/R (Hold down) Rewind/fast forward while being pressed Background playback →P228 Switch the Repeat setting Switch the Equalizer setting 1-5 Change the screen design 7䋯9 Display the previous/next image Music Playback Continue on the next page 217 Key Description I[List] Open the Chapter list Toggle Music channel player and playing backgroung Note • Playback is paused for the following. It will resume automatically after the operation completes. - When a voice or video call arrives - When i-mode mail or SMS is Received - When an alarm sounds • A program with restrictions on playback cannot be played after the number of Replays, Expiration date, or File period is exceeded. A confirmation asking whether to delete the program appears when you attempt to play such a program. Selecting "Yes" deletes the program. You can check the number of Replays, Expiration date, or File period in the file detail information. • When you attempt to play a partially downloaded program, a confirmation asking whether to download the remaining data appears. Select "Yes" to start downloading. Select "Play" to play the downloaded chapters. Sub Menu on the Music Channel Screen Sub Menu on the Music Channel Player Screen Show/hide the image Music channel screen (P209)XMove the cursor to a programXM[Menu] XPerform the following operations [Move Program] Move the selected programs from "Distributed Program" folder.→P219 [Delete] Delete the selected program. X"Yes" [Program information] Display information about the selected program. [Chapter list] List chapters of the selected program.→P218 [Program skip] Previous program䋺 Playback the previous program. Next program 䋺 Playback the next program. BGM Play songs in the background. [Minimize] The song is played in background.→P228 [Chapter list] List chapters of the program in playback.→P218 [Chapter info] Display information about the chapter in playback. [Program info.] Display information about the program in playback. [Set repeat] 䋺 Playback is not repeated. None Current song䋺 The program in playback is repeated. 䋺 All programs are repeated. All songs [Equalizer] Tone control when playing music. X"Normal"/"Classic"/"Jazz"/"Pop"/"Rock"/ "Dance"/"Bass booster"/"Vocal" [Chapter Image] Display or save the chapter image/program image to the Data box.→P224 [Player skin] Change the appearance of the Music channel player screen. XSelect a skinXC [Connect to URL] Access the site if the program in playback contains a URL. X"Yes" [Connect to URL] Access the site if the selected program contains a URL. X"Yes" Note • Deleting programs does not cancel the program setting. Programs are automatically downloaded until you access the Music channel site and cancel the setting. 218 Music Playback Music channel player screen (P209)X M[Menu]XPerform the following operations Displaying the Chapter List of the Program Select and play a chapter, or display information. Music channel player screen (P216)X I[List] • 䃨 appears next to the chapter in playback. • C[Play] : Play the selected chapter. • I[Info.] : Display information about the selected chapter. Playing a Program from the Data box Program icons shown on the Music Channel The following icons found on the Music Channel / Program List screens show the program download status or the type of the program. Icon M[Menu]X channel" The Folder list screen opens. If you have any playable programs, they may be played. • I[New] : Create a new folder. Description 䋯 Played or un-played programs with their played count restricted 䋯 Played or un-played programs without their played count restricted 䋯 Programs moved from "Distributred Program" folder 䋯 Programs that are partially obtained Programs that could not be updated Programs that are scheduled but not obtained. Programs that are currently being obtained. Moving to "Save Program" folder Downloaded programs can be moved from "Distributed program" folder to another folder so that they will not be overwritten. Moved programs can be played from the "Music channel" in the "Data box". Music channel screen (P216)XMove the cursor to a programXM[Menu] X"Save program" Select a folderXI[Move] • Select a folder other than "Download program" folder Note • Downloaded programs cannot be copied. • Partially downloaded programs cannot be moved. • Programs can be moved only in the FOMA handset. They cannot be moved on the microSD memory card. Select a folderXC[Open] The Program list screen opens. Select a programXM[Play] Sub Menu on the Folder List Screen Chapters obtained Chapters not obtained (Data box)X"Music Folder list screen (P219)XMove the cursor to a folderXI[Menu]X Perform the following operations • I[Delete]: Delete the selected program. [New folder] Create a new folder. XEnter a folder name • You cannot create a sub folder in a user-defined folder. [Rename] XEdit a folder name [Delete] Delete the selected folder. X"Yes" Note • The "Distributed Program" folder cannot be renamed or deleted. Sub Menu on the Program List Screen Program list screen (P219)XMove the cursor to a programXM[Menu]X Perform the following operations [Play] Play the selected program. [Move program] Move the selected program from the "Distributed program" folder. [Rename] Change the title of the selected program. Operating the Music Channel from the Data box [Delete] Delete the selected program. X"Yes" [Delete all] Delete all programs in the folder. X"Yes" You can play or move the programs distributed from "Music channel" in "Data box", or you can edit the program titles. Music Playback 219 [Multiple choice] Select and delete programs. XPlace a check mark next to a program to deleteX I[Delete]X"Yes" • Press M[Menu] to select "Mark", "Mark all", "Unmark", "Unmark all" [Program info.] Display information about the selected program. [Chapter list] Open the Chapter list.→P218 [New folder] Create a new folder. XEnter a folder name • You cannot create a sub folder in a user-defined folder. [List view/Grid view] Switch between list and picture display. Saving Music Downloading Chaku-Uta-Full® • Up to 998 Chaku-Uta-Full® songs can be saved and up to 5MB can be saved per song. • Downloaded Chaku-Uta-Full® is saved in the "Music" in the "Data box". When the download completes, a confirmation opens. Available Players • You can play Chaku-Uta-Full® or SD-Audio compliant music data. • Download Chaku-Uta-Full® from i-mode. Save SD-Audio compliant songs using "SD-Jukebox" (commercial item) from a PC. • Before downloading music from a Web site, read the license agreement (license and prohibited activities, etc.) carefully. • Music saved in the FOMA handset or on a microSD memory card can be played for personal use only. When playing music, do not violate the third party's intellectual property rights, such as copyright or other rights. Do not copy or move music saved in the FOMA handset or on a microSD memory card to other media, such as a PC. • Precautions for Using or Handling a microSD Memory Card →P206 220 Music Playback "Save" Play : Play the downloaded Chaku-Uta-Full®. File property : Display information about the downloaded Chaku-Uta-Full®. You can play music with the FOMA handset in one of the following ways: • Playing with the Music player Play Chaku-Uta-Full® downloaded from sites. • Playing with the SD-Audio player Play SD-Audio compatible songs saved to the microSD memory card from a PC. • Playing as an i-motion movie Play an audio only i-motion movie downloaded using i-mode and saved in the Data box.→P201 You can use mail or access an i-mode site while listening to music (Background playback).→P228 Music Player/SD Audio Player Access a site that provides Chaku-UtaFull®XSelect Chaku-Uta-Full® to download Back : Return to the Web site without saving the Chaku-Uta-Full®. Note • The Chaku-Uta-Full" files with the same name cannot be saved in a single folder. Saving SD-Audio data in microSD memory card The following is required to play SD-Audio compliant music data with the FOMA handset: • FOMA L705i handset • FOMA USB connection cable • PC (Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows 2000 (Japanese version)) • SD-Jukebox (commercial item) • A CD that contains the music you want to save • microSD memory card SD-Jukebox (commercial item) You can purchase SD-Jukebox from the following URL: http://www.sense.panasonic.co.jp/PanaSense/ special/soft/sd_jukebox/ SD-Jukebox supports Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows 2000 (Japanese edition). For detailed information about the requirements for SD-Jukebox, visit http://panasonic.jp/support/ software/sdjb/ Insert the bundled CD-ROM into the CD-drive on your PC b Click "Entertainment Tool" Install SD-Jukebox on your PC Follow the on-screen instruction to purchase SDJukebox. For details on how to set up SD-Jukebox, see [Artist] Sort and display music files in "All songs" folder by artist. Set the "USB mode setting" to "microSD mode" to connect the FOMA handset with your PC.→P210 [Genre] Sort and display music files in "All songs" folder by genre. Save music data in a microSD memory card. [Album] Sort and display music files in "All songs" folder by album. Start SD-Jukebox installed on your PC and save music data in a microSD memory card. • See SD-Jukebox Help on how to use SDJukebox. • After you save, remove the FOMA USB connection cable from your PC. Playing Music You can play music (Chaku-Uta Full)®) saved in the FOMA handset or on a microSD memory card. 䂓 File Format Available with Chaku-Uta-Full File format MP4 Bit rate MPEG-4 AAC: 8-128 Kbps HE-AAC: 8-128 Kbps Enhanced aacPlus: 16-48 kbps Capacity 998 songs Max number of playlists Up to 10 playlists [All songs] Display up to 50 songs saved in the FOMA handset and the microSD memory card.→P222 M[Menu]X (Music)X"Music player"XPerform the following operations Note • To play the last played song, M[Menu] X (Music) X Select "Recent played"䋪 or hold down G for 1+ seconds on the Stand-by display. 䋪 : "Playing" appears during playback. Selecting the song opens the Player screen for the song in playback. • Sorting conditions for Artists, Genre and Album is in accordance with the detailed information about the music file. MUSIC Menu Pressing G on the Stand-by display opens the "Music channel" and play menus. The play menu allows you to switch among the "Music Screen", "SD-Audio Screen", and "Music Channel Screen" by pressing J. Music Screen SD-Audio Screen䋪 Music Channel Screen 䋪䋺 Does not appear when no SD-Audio compatible songs are saved on the microSD memory card. Music Screen [Music life] You can play songs for special times or environments. →P228 [Playlist] Display, create, or play a Playlist.→P225 Music Playback 221 Key Continuously Playing Music You can continuously play all songs saved in the FOMA handset and the microSD memory card, or only songs specified by artist name, genre, or album title. Ex: To play music in "All songs" GX"Music player"X"All songs" • : Music saved on the FOMA handset : Music saved on the microSD memory card • (Hold down) Background playback →P228 Switch the Shuffle setting Switch the Repeat setting Switch the Equalizer setting 1 -5 Change the screen design 7䋯 9 Display the previous/next image Switch Jacket image/Lyrics/Hide I[List] Display the Music data list screen Switch whether to play in the music player or to play in the background Music Data List Screen (Ex: When the player skin is "Chocolate Melody") Description Rewind/fast forward while being pressed L/ R Note • Playback is paused for the following. It will resume automatically after the operation completes. - When a voice or video call arrives - When receiving i mode mail or SMS - When an alarm sounds • Sound effects such as the key tone do not sound during music playback. Move the cursor to a song XC[Play] Selected songs are played in the order in the music list. Sub Menu on the Music Data List Screen Music Player Screen a Volume b Song title and artist name c Playback progress bar Shows the playback elapsed time. d Equalizer setting e Jacket image/Stand-by image/Lyrics f Playback status g Repeat setting Current song All songs h Shuffle setting Appears when enabling "Shuffle ON" 䂓 Key operations on the Music player screen Key 222 Description Pause/Play C(1+ sec) Skip to the beggining of the song, then pause H F/E Adjust the volume L/R Play from the beginning of the current chapter or go to the previous chapter/ play the next chapter Music Playback Music data list screen (P222)XMove the cursor to dataXM[Menu]X Perform the following operations • C[Play] : Play the selected music. • I[Playlist] : Add the selected music to the playlist.→P226 [Play] Play the selected song. [Add to Playlist] Add the selected music to the Playlist.→P226 [Multiple choice]䋪1 Select and play multiple songs. Operations during playback are the same as for a Playlist.→P225 XPlace a check mark next each song to playX I[Play] • M[Menu] : Select from "Play", "Add to Playlist", and "Mark/Unmark". You can add a checked song to a playlist selecting "Add to playlist" [Search]䋪2 Specify "Title", "Artist", "Album", "Genre", or "Year" to search music. XSelect an itemXEnter the itemXI[Search] • All songs that match all specified conditions are displayed. [Sort by]䋪1 Sort songs by setting a condition. X"Title"/"Artist"/"Album"/"Genre"/"Track No."/ "Year" [File property] View or edit information about the selected song. XSelect an item X I[Edit] X Edit the item • Some items cannot be edited. Setting a Song as a Ring Tone Music player screen (P222)XM[Menu] X"Set as tone" Select a range to set as the ring tone 䋪1䋺 Does not appear for the SD Audio player. 䋪2䋺 Music data in Artists/Genre/Album will not be in the list screen. Sub Menu on the Music Player Screen Music player screen (P222)XI [Menu]XPerform the following operations [Go to MUSIC] Display music screen while playing music.→P221 [BGM] Play in the background.→P228 [List] Display the Music data list screen.→P222 [File property] View information about the song in playback. [Shuffle ON/OFF] Enable or disable shuffle play. [Set repeat] 䋺 Playback is not repeated. None Current song 䋺 The song in playback is repeated. 䋺 Play all songs on the Music data list All songs screen repeatedly. [Lyric]䋪 Display or save the Lyrics to the Data box.→P224 [Set as ring tone]䋪 Set the song in playback as a ring tone.→P223 Voice ring tone 䋺 Set as a ring tone for a voice call. Video ring tone䋺 Set as a ring tone for a video call. 䋺 Set as a ring tone for i-mode Mail tone mail. Message R tone 䋺 Set as a ringtone for Message R. Message F tone䋺 Set as a ring tone for Message F. SMS tone 䋺 Set as a ring tone for SMS. Alarm tone䋺 Set as an alarm tone. [Full song ring tone] Set the entire song in playback as a ring tone. [Point ring tone] If the song in the playback has already a range specified, this option can be selected. XSelect a range [Free point ring tone] Specify and set a free range as a ring tone. XUseJto find a starting pointXM[Start]XUse Jto find an ending pointXM[Done] Note • If selecting "Alarm tone", further select which alarm. • Some songs may not be set as a ring tone. [Equalizer] Control the tone when playing. X"Normal"/"Classic"/"Jazz"/"Pop"/"Rock"/"Dance"/ "Bass booster"/"Vocal" [Jacket image] Display or save the Jacket image to the Data box. →P224 Select a ring tone type Viewing Details about a Song Music player screen (P222)XI [Menu]X"Set as tone" • I[Edit] : Edit properties. [Player skin] Change the appearance of the Music player screen. XSelect a skin [Connect to URL]䋪 Access the site if the song in playback contains a URL. X"Yes" 䋪䋺 Does not appear for the SD Audio Player. Music Playback 223 䂓 Information displayed on the File property screen 224 Item Description Title Display the song name Artist Display the artist name Album Display the album name Year Display the year when the song was released Genre Display the genre Comment Display comments Track No. Display the song numbers and the total number of songs in the album Composer Display the composer name Lyricist Display the lyricist name View Images or Lyrics Contained in a Song You can view and save Jacket images, Stand-by images, Lyrics, or chapters/program images contained in programs downloaded using the Music channel. Music player screen(P222)/Music channel player screen(P209)XM [Menu]X"Jacket image"/"Lyric"X Perform the following operations [Next image] View the next image or lyrics. Right holder Display the copyright holder Selling agency Display the selling agency [Previous image] View the previous image or lyrics. Rights info. Display the information about rights [Full view] View an image or lyrics to fit the screen. Label Display the label URL Display the related URL Full song ring tone Display whether the entire song can be set as a ring tone Point ring tone Display whether the pre-set range of the song can be set as a ring tone Free point ring tone Display whether a user-defined range of the song can be set as a ring tone Savable jacket image Display whether there is a jacket image that can be saved Savable image Display whether there is an image that can be saved Savable lyric Display whether there are lyrics that can be saved Audio Display the sound format Bit rate Display the bit rate Playing time Display the file playback duration File Name Display the file name File Size Display the file size File Type Display the file format Date & Time (Saved) Display the saved date and time Original title Display the default title of the file File Restriction Source Display whether the file is restricted →P198 Display the source Move to microSD Indicates whether the file can be moved to a microSD memory card Replays/ Expiration date/ File period Display information of replays/ expiration date/file period DRM info. Display whether the copyright is controlled Music Playback [Display On/Off ] Show/hide the image or lyrics. [Save in Data box] Save the displayed image or lyrics to "i-mode" in "My Pictures" in the Data box. "Yes" Using Playlist You can specify the order to play songs in a Playlist. You can play any songs in the order of your choice from all songs saved in the FOMA handset and on the microSD memory card. Creating a Playlist Up to 10 Playlists and up to 50 songs per Playlist can be saved. GX"Music player"X"Playlist" Place a check mark next to each song to save to the PlaylistXI[Done] The Playlist list screen opens. I[New]XEnter a Playlist name Up to 30 full-pitch or half-pitch characters can be entered. 䂓 For the songs in the Music Player, press M[Menu] to select "File property", "Mark all", "Unmark all", or "Sort by". Note • If you delete Chaku-Uta-Full® songs saved in the playlists or move them between the FOMA handset and microSD memory card, they will be removed from the playlist. Sub Menu on the Playlist Music List Screen Playing a Playlist The Playlist music list screen opens. Move the cursor to a song XC[Play] • I[Add] : Add the song to the displayed Playlist. Selected songs are played in the order in the music list. Sub Menu on the Playlist List Screen Playlist music list screen (P225) X Move the cursor to a song X M[Menu] X Perform the following operations Playlist list screen (P224)XSelect a Playlist Playlist list screen (P224)XMove the cursor to a PlaylistXM[Menu]X Perform the following operations [Play] Play the selected Playlist. [New playlist] Create a Playlist.→P224 [Rename] Change the Playlist name. XEdit the Playlist name [Copy playlist]䋪 Copy the selected Playlist and create a new Playlist. X "Yes" X Enter a name of the new Playlist [Delete playlist] Delete the selected Playlist. X"Yes" [Multiple choice] Select and delete Playlists. XPlace a check mark next to each Playlist to deleteXI[Delete]X"Yes" • Press M[Menu] to select "Delete" or "Mark/ Unmark". 䋪䋺 Does not appear for the SD Audio player. Note • These options are not available for "All songs" and "Quick playlist". • This option is not available for "All songs". [Play] Play the selected song. [Add songs] Add songs to the displayed Playlist. XPlace a check mark next to each song to add X I[Done] • Press M[Menu] to select "File property", "Mark all", "Unmark all", and "Sort by". [Move] Change the order of the selected songs. XLocate a position to move to. [Delete from list] Delete the selected song from the Playlist. [Multiple choice] Select and play multiple songs. Operations during playback are the same as for a Playlist.→P225 XPlace a check mark next each song to playXI [Play] • Press M[Menu] to select "Play", "Delete from list", and "Mark/Unmark". [Search] Specify "Title", "Artist", "Album", "Genre", or "Year" to search music. XSelect an itemXEnter the itemXI[Search] • All songs that match all specified conditions are displayed. [Sort by]䋪 Sort songs by setting a condition. X"Title"/"Artist"/"Album"/"Genre"/"Track No."/ "Year" [File property] View or edit information about the selected song. X Select an item X I[Edit] X Edit the item • Some items cannot be edited. 䋪䋺 Does not appear for the SD Audio player. Music Playback 225 Adding Songs to a Playlist GX"Music player"X"All songs" Move the cursor to a song to saveXI[Playlist]XSelect a Playlist • I[New] : Create a new Playlist with the selected song. • For Chaku-Uta® and Chaku-Uta=Full®, you can do the following operation. 䂓 To save multiple songs M[Menu]X"Select multiple"XPlace a check mark next to each song to saveXM[Menu] XSelect "Add to Playlist". Saving Songs to the Quick Playlist Hold down A on the Music data list screen to save the selected song to the "Quick playlist". It is useful for you to collect up the songs you often listen to. To play, select the "Quick playlist" on the Playlist list screen. Managing Folders, Playlists, and Music Data 䂓 Managing Songs on the microSD Memory Card "micro SD" X Move the cursor to a song X M[Menu] XPerform the following operations [Files] 䋺 Play the selected song. Play Move 䋺 Move the selected song to another folder. XSelect a destination folderXI[Move] Copy 䋺 Copy the selected song to another folder. XSelect a destination folderXI[Copy] Delete 䋺 Delete the selected song. X"Yes" Delete 䋺 Delete all songs in the folder. all X"Yes" Rename䋺 Rename the selected song. XEdit a file name Reset 䋺 Reset the display name of the selected file to display its default name. name [Multiple choice] Select and delete songs. XPlace a check mark next to the songs to deleteX I[Delete]X"Yes" • You can move/copy multiple songs with the following operation. • XCheck off the songs you want to copy or delete • X M[Manu] X "Move"/"Copy" X Select a destination folder X I"Move"/"Copy" • M[Menu] : Select from "Move", "Copy", "Delete", "Mark", "Mark all", "Unmark", and "Unmark all". Songs are saved in the "Music" folder in the Data box. SD-Audio compatible songs are saved in the "SD-audio" folder in the Data box. Delete or move songs from the Data box. [File property] View or edit information about the selected song. XSelect an item X I[Edit] X Edit the item • Some items cannot be edited. [Send] Not available M[Menu]X (Data box)X"Music" • I[Switch] : Switch between list and picture display. 䂓 Managing SD-Audio Compatible Songs M[Menu]X (Data box)XSelect "SD-audio" Move the cursor to a songXM[Menu] XPerform the following operations 䂓 To Manage Playlists Select a "Playlist" X Move the cursor onto the playlist X M[Menu] X Perform the operations described in "Sub Menu on the Playlist Music List Screen" (P225). 226 䂓 To maintain music data in microSD memory card "micro SD" X Move the cursor to music data X M[Menu] X Perform the following operations Music Playback [Set as tone] Set the selected song as a ring tone.→P223 [List view/Grid view] Switch between list and picture display. [Sort by] Sort songs by setting a condition. X"Title"/"Artist"/"Album"/"Genre"/"Track No."/ "Year" [Memory info.] Handset 䋺 Shows free space in the FOMA handset. memory External 䋺 Shows free space on the microSD memory memory card. [New folder] Create a new folder. XEnter a folder name • Sub folders can be created in a folder up to two layers. Note • When the "Playlist" folder or "SD-Audio" folder is open, press I[New] to create a new Playlist.→P224 Sub Menu while a Folder Selected Move cursor to a folder XM[Menu]X Performs the following operations [Rename] XEdit a folder name [New folder] Create a new folder. XEnter a folder name • Sub folders can be created in a folder up to two layers. Playing Songs with the SD-Audio Player You can play SD-Audio-compliant songs saved on the microSD memory card. 䂓 Available SD Audio file formats File Format MPEG-2AAC Bit rate (stereo) 16䌾128kbps The number of songs that can be saved Up to 998 songs The number of playlists that can be created Up to 10 playlists GX"SD-Audio Player"XPerform the following operations [Delete] Delete the selected folder. X"Yes" [List view/Grid view] Switch between list and picture display. [Sort by] Sort songs by setting a condition. X"Title"/"Artist"/"Album"/"Genre"/"Track No."/ "Year" [Memory info.] Handset 䋺 Shows free space in the FOMA handset. memory External 䋺 Shows free space on the microSD memory memory card. [Folder property] The folder size, the number of files in the folder, and the number of folders in the folder are displayed. Note • The "Playlist" and "micro SD" folders cannot be renamed or deleted. SD-Audio [Music life] You can play songs for special times or environments. →P228 [Playlist] Display, create, or play a Playlist.→P224 [All songs] Display up to 999 SD-Audio-compliant songs saved on the microSD memory card.→P222 [Artist] Sort and display music files in "All songs" folder by artist.→P222 [Genre] Sort and display music files in "All songs" folder by genre.→P222 [Album] Sort and display music files in "All songs" folder by album.→P222 Note • Operations are the same for the Music player expect the following: - Sub menu items not available for the SD-Audio player are not displayed. - SD-Audio-compliant song information cannot be edited. Music Playback 227 Music life Playback in background Playing songs for Special Times or Environments. Using Other Applications While Listening to Music Default Train : All songs, level 2 Sport timer : All songs 30 Min. Sport timer : All songs 30 Min. You can play songs suitable for occasions such as when commuting, playing sports, or going to bed. GX"Music player"/"SDAudio player" X"Music life"XPerform the following operations [Train] Vocal sound is emphasized so that lyrics can be clearly heard even in a low volume when you commute. Songs are played in random order. Playlist 䋺 Select "All songs" or a Playlist. XSelect "All songs" or a Playlist • C[List] : List Playlists. Vocal 䋺 Place emphasis on vocal sounds. XSelect the level of emphasis [Sports timer] Songs are played for a set period. You can use this option as a timer when you want to run for a certain time. The selected Playlist is repeatedly played for the specified time period. 䋺 Select "All songs" or a Playlist. Playlist XSelect "All songs" or a Playlist • C[List] : List Playlists. Playing time䋺 Enter the playback time. Up to 1200 minutes can be entered. XEnter the playback time [Sleeping] You can set an off timer to stop the playback automatically when lying in bed listening to music. The volume is gradually reduced about five minutes before the playback ends. The selected Playlist is repeatedly played for the specified time period. Playlist 䋺 Select "All songs" or a Playlist. XSelect "All songs" or a Playlist • C[List] : List Playlists. Off timer 䋺 Enter a value of minutes until the playback stops. Up to 1200 minutes can be entered. XEnter the time 228 I[Play] Music Playback Press G during a music playback Open the Stand-by display during music playback. Note • On the Stand-by display, song names and artist names are displayed. • During the background playback, press F/Eto adjust the volume. • Press G during the background playback to return to the Music player in playback. • To stop the background playback, press PX select "Yes". • During background playback, an i-motion movie set for the Stand-by display will not be played. The default Stand-by display opens instead. • While a song on the microSD memory card is played in background, the other functions cannot access to the microSD memory card. Select XP "Yes" to stop the background playback. Other Useful Functions Multi-access..................................................................................................Multi-access Multitasking .................................................................................................. Multitasking Sounding the Alarm at Set Times.......................................................................... Alarm Managing Schedule Events.............................................................................. Schedule Managing To Do Tasks ..................................................................................... To Do list Managing Anniversaries.................................................................Remembering Dates Quick Access to Frequently Used Applications .....................................Custom Menu Registering Your Name and Image............................................................ Own Number Checking Call Duration/Call Cost .................................................................................... Setting a Call Cost Limit...................................................................... Set call cost limit Using the World Clock................................................................................. World Clock Using the Stopwatch....................................................................................... Stopwatch Using the Unit Converter......................................................................... Unit Converter Using the Calculator ........................................................................................Calculator Using Memos......................................................................................................... Memos Talking Using the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch .................................... Automatically Receiving a Call Connecting the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch................................................................................................... Auto Answer Chiming the Hour .................................................................................... Hour Indication Checking Memory Usage ........................................................................ Memory status Restoring Various Function Settings to Their Defaults .............................Reset/Clear Deleting All Saved Data at Once.............................................................. Clear memory 230 230 231 232 235 237 238 239 239 240 240 241 241 242 243 244 244 245 245 245 246 229 Multi-access Using Other Communications during a Voice Call Multi-access Multi-access is a function that allows the use of three lines (voice call, packet communication, and SMS) concurrently. Communication Type During a voice call, you can perform operations such as sending/receiving mail or connecting to i-mode. Available Line Voice call 1 line Packet communication including i-mode, i-appli, i-mode mail, and PC connections 1 line from the left SMS 1 line Sending Mail Voice call screen XN(1+ seconds)X"Mail" Create and send mail Note Note • Combination of Lines →P302 • During Multi-access, communication charges apply for each connected line. • During a video call, Multi-access is disabled except for incoming SMS. • Creating and sending mail →P161, P181 Receiving Mail An icon (P32) to notify of incoming mail appears at the top of the screen. Making a Voice Call during Packet Communication By invoking "New task" screen, a voice call can be made during packet communication such as i-mode(P231). Example: Making a voice call during i-mode operation i-mode screen(P139)XN(1+seconds) X"Call" The Phone number entry screen opens. Enter a phone numberXA Note • To return to the i-mode screen from the Voice call screen press N and select "i-mode". Voice call Connecting to i-mode Voice call screen XN(1+ seconds) X"i-mode" Note • To return to the Voice call screen, press P X Select "Yes" Multitasking Multitasking Receiving a Voice Call during Packet Communication A voice call can be received during packet communication such as i-mode. Example: Receiving a voice call during i-mode operation A call arrives The Incoming call screen opens. Note • To return to the i-mode screen from the Voice call screen (P49) press N and select "i-mode". 230 Other Useful Functions This FOMA handset provides multitasking that allows you to start and operate two or more applications concurrently. Task manager Launching a New Function To launch a new function while another function is running, open the New task screen (Task manager). a While using an applicationXN(for 1+ seconds) While using an applicationXN • Select "New task" on the Task list screen to open the New task screen that allows you to launch another application. Unavailable functions are grayed out. Task list screen New task screen Select an application to start • Available applications vary depending on the currently running application and its operating status. The running functions are Use K to select an application The screen for the selected application will be displayed. Dialing䌝 The Phone number entry screen opens.䇯 →P50 䌛 䌛 Mail䌝 The Mail menu screen opens.→P160 䌛 i-mode䌝 The i-mode menu screen opens.→P138 i-appli䌝 The Software list screen opens.→P185 䌛 Terminating an Application Close the currently displayed application and open the previously displayed application. To terminate an applicationXQ/P • To close an application, make it current application first. • Repeat these steps to close other applications. Search phonebook䌝 The Search phonebook screen opens.→P83 䌛 Alarm Photo-mode䌝 The Still image capture screen opens.→P129 䌛 Sounding the Alarm at Set Times 䌛 Schedule䌝 The Month view calendar screen opens.→P232 䌛 To Do list䌝 The To do list screen opens.→P235 The FOMA handset can be used as an alarm clock. Up to ten alarms can be registered. Memo䌝 The Memo list screen opens.→P243 䌛 Calculator䌝 The Calculator screen opens.→P242 䌛 M[Menu]X (Stationery)X"Alarm" • Press to set the selected alarm "On"/"Off". Own number䌝 The Own number screen opens.→P48 䌛 Alarm List Screen Note • Combination of Applications →P303 䂓 Icons displayed on the Alarm list screen. Icon Switching/Confirming Applications To switch or confirm applications, open the Task list screen. Description Alarm set to "On". Alarm with "Set repeat" set. Move the cursor to an alarm to be edited X C[Edit] Perform the following operation • C[List] : Display the setting items list screen for the selected item. Other Useful Functions Continue on the next page 231 [ (On/Off list)] Set whether to enable the alarm. X"ON"/"OFF" [°e (Set time)] Set the time for the alarm to sound. [ (Set repeat)] Select a repetition type. X "Once"/"Daily"/Daily except holiday"/"Mon-Fri"/ "Weekdays" • If you select "Daily except holiday", the alarm does not sound on Sundays and holidays set in "Set holiday" (P234). "Weekdays" is selected, perform the following steps to specify the days of the week for the alarm to start: X D X C [List] in the "Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa" field X place check marks next to days of the week X I [Done] [ (Alarm tone)] Select an alarm tone. Music 䋺 Selects the music saved in "Music" in the "Data box "folder.→P224 i-motion䋺 Select a movie/i-mode saved in "i-motion" in "Data box".→P201 Melody 䋺 Select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the "Data box".→P204 [ (Memo)] Up to 7 full-pitch or 15 half-pitch characters can be entered. The entered text is displayed on the Alarm screen after the alarm starts. [ (Turbo Alarm)] Set whether to enable the Turbo Alarm that increases its volume levels up to the maximum volume and vibrates the handset. X "Off"/"On (Max. Ring&Vib)" [ (Snooze)] Set whether to enable the Turbo Alarm that increases its volume levels up to the maximum volume and vibrates the handset. I[Done] [Multiple choice] Select alarm and set whether to enable the alarm. 䋺 XPlace check marks next to the alarms X M [Menu] X "On"/"Off" • You can also select "Mark/Unmark" X "Mark all", "Mark"*, "Unmark"*, or "Unmark all" by pressing M[Menu]. 䋪䋺 Either one appears depending on the alarm status. When the alarms for "Alarm" and "Schedule"/"To Do" reach the specified time The following actions are performed by function. Alarm The alarm screen appears, the alarm tone sounds and the illumination lights. • To stop the alarm, press C[Off]. • When the "Snooze interval" time is set, to stop the alarm temporarily and sound the alarm tone again when a set period of time has elapsed, press I[Snooze]. • When the alarm for which "Snooze interval" time is set is not stopped, the alarm tone sounds again in about 5 minutes regardless of the setting of the snooze interval time. The alarm tone sounds repeatedly for 1 hour, up to 12 times. Schedule The schedule alarm screen appears, the alarm tone sounds and the illumination lights. • To stop the alarm, press C[OK] and then C[Off] on the Schedule detail screen. • To sound the alarm tone again, select I[Snooze] X Select a snooze interval. • When the alarm for Schedule cannot be stopped, the alarm tone sounds again in about 5 minutes regardless of the setting of the snooze interval time. (Confirming specs) To Do The To Do alarm screen appears, the alarm tone sounds and the illumination lights. • To stop the alarm, press C[OK] and then C[Off] on the To Do detail screen. When the alarm for Alarm, Schedule and To Do are set to the same time The priority order for the alarm is Alarm → Schedule alarm → To Do alarm. (Confirming specs) Sub Menu on the Alarm List Screen Alarm list screen (P231)XM[Menu] XPerform the following operations [Edit] Edit the selected alarm.→P231 [Turn On(Off)] Activate/deactivate the selected alarm. Schedule Managing Schedule Events Registering Schedule Events You can save a schedule event such as a meeting or appointment. Up to 200 Schedule events and up to 100 holidays can be saved. 232 Other Useful Functions a M[Menu]X (Stationery)X"Schedule" XMove the cursor to the day to be saved in ScheduleXI[New]X Perform the following operations • C[List] : Display the setting items list screen for the selected item. • When the cursor is in the time setting field, you can stop creating a schedule event by selecting M [Cancel] X "Yes". New Memo Creation [ (Start Date)] Specify the date to start the Schedule event. To enter a date, use J to move the cursor to the position and enter a number with dial keys. Press C[List] to select the day from a calendar. [ (End Date)] Specify the date to complete the Schedule event. To enter a date, use J to move the cursor to the position and enter a number with dial keys. Press J[List] to select the day from a calendar. The end date cannot be set earlier than the start date. [ (Set time)] Specify the times to start/end the Schedule event. All day 䋺 Save the schedule event for a whole day without specifying time. Set time 䋺 After setting, use D to move the cursor and enter the start and end time of the schedule event. Use J to move the cursor to the position and enter the time with dial keys and switch between "AM" and "PM" with C (pressing C in the time field opens the Time settings screen that allows you to enter time with dial keys and H). • The end time cannot be set earlier than the start time. • Depending on the settings in "Date&Time format" (P106), the display order or format for the date and time may differ. [ (Set alarm)] Set whether to be notified with an alarm tone of the set starting date and time. If you select other than "No alarm", perform the following steps to select the alarm tone. Music 䋺 Selects the music saved in "Music" in the "Data box "folder.→P224 i-motion 䋺 Select a movie/i-mode saved in "i-motion" in "Data box".→P201 Melody 䋺 Select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the "Data box".→P204 [ (Set repeat)] Set how to repeat the Schedule event. Select "Once" not to repeat. When selecting "Weekly", further specify the day of the week. [ (Secret)] This option appears when the Secret mode setting (P117) is "Secret mode". Set this option to "On" if you save the created Phonebook entry as secret data. I[Done] Note • When the "Secret mode" (P117) is set to "Secret only mode", the Schedule entry is saved as secret data. • The secret Schedule is displayed when the "Secret mode" is set to "On" or "Secret only mode". • The secret Schedule is saved as secret data even if it is edited with the "Secret mode" set to "On". • When the set time for the secret Schedule event for which the alarm is set with the "Secret mode" set to "Off" comes, the alarm tone sounds without displaying the saved contents and "Secret" appears on the notification screen. [ (Category)] Select a category of the Schedule event.Icons vary depending on the selected category. [ (Subject)] Up to 200 full-pitch or 400 half-pitch characters can be entered. The subject is displayed on the Monthly and Weekly view screen. [ (Summary)] Up to 20 full-pitch or 40 half-pitch characters can be entered. The summary is displayed on the Alarm screen that opens when the alarm starts. Other Useful Functions Continue on the next page 233 Note Viewing Schedule Events • National Holidays are based on "࿖᳃䈱ᣣ䈮 㑐䈜䉎 ᴺᓞ䈶⠧ੱ䈱৻ㇱ䉕 ᡷᱜ䈜䉎 ᴺᓞ (ᐔᚑ13ᐕᴺᓞ╙59ภ) (law relating to national holidays and old-age persons' welfare, as amended (Law No. 59, 2001))". Spring Equinox Day and Autumnal Equinox Day are released in an official gazette on February 1 and may not be exact (as of 䃂, 2007). You can view settings of a schedule event from the Calendar screen. • The Month view calendar appears by default. M[Menu]X (Stationery)X"Schedule" Switching the Calendar View The Calendar screen can be viewed on monthly basis or weekly basis.Perform the following steps to switch views. X On the Calendar screen M [Menu] X "Weekly view"/"Monthly view" Calendar screen (Month View) Screen 䇸 ⚳ᣣ䇹 ⸳ቯ䈱䉴 䉬 䉳䊠 䊷 䊦䈏䈅 䉎 ᣣ a The day when a schedule event is set b A schedule event saved for the highlighted day Up to 2 events will be displayed. Schedule events that have passed their start times will not be displayed. • • • • Select the day to view • J : Switch to the previous/next day. Schedule list screen a Date b Icon indicating a "Category" c Start time – End time, Subject d larm icon e Appears when the alarm is set to sound. f Icon indicating a schedule event set for other than Japan time Appears if the schedule event's "Local time zone" is set to other than "GMT+9:00" (out of Japan). 234 䉪 䊨 䊷䊦␜䈪䈐 䉁 䈜䇯 ㅳන␜ 79/FE : Switch the view by month. 䍃 H䈪␜䈘 䉏䈩䈇䈭䈇ᤨ㑆䉕 䉴 13 : Switch the view by year. 5 : Return to the current date. On the Month view, the blue indicates Saturday, and the red indicates Sunday and holidays. • You can switch between the Monthly and Weekly view of the Calendar screen. 䉴 䉬 䉳䊠 䊷䊦䈱⊓㍳ᤨ㑆 Select the event to view The Schedule detail screen opens. Other Useful Functions Sub Menu on the Calendar View Month view screen (P234)/Week view screen (P225)XM]Menu]XPerform the following operations [Add new] Register a new Schedule event.→P232 [Set holiday/Clear holiday] Set or release a selected day as a holiday. To set a day as a holiday, select "Set holiday" X select an option from the following X enter a "Holiday name" X I [Done] On the 䋺 Set the highlighted day as a holiday. day Weekly 䋺 Set the day of the week of the highlighted day as a weekly holiday. Monthly䋺 Set the date of the highlighted day as a monthly holiday. Annually䋺 Set the date of the highlighted day as an annual holiday. Duration (2 ~ 31) 䋺 Set a period from 2 to 31 days as holidays from the highlighted day. Enter the number of days in the "Duration (2-31)" field. [Week view/Month view] Switch the view by week or by month.→P232 [Go to date] The Calendar view for the specified day appears. Use J to move the cursor to the position in the "Enter date you want to go to" field, and enter the date and time with dial keys. [Delete] 䋺 Delete all events scheduled prior to today. Delete previous entries Delete all 䋺 Delete all Schedule events. want to go to" field, and enter the date and time with dial keys. [Delete] Delete the selected Schedule event. [Copy to microSD card]䋪1 Copy the selected Schedule events to the microSD memory card. 䋪1䋺 Not available when you are using the default or "Set holiday" configuration. 䋪2䋺 Not displayed on the Schedule detail screen. [Send all via IrDA] Send all Schedule events via IrDA.→P212 To Do list Managing To Do Tasks [Memory Info] Schedule events and holidays status will be displayed. • If "Secret mode" is set to "On" or "Secret only mode", the number of pieces of secret data is shown in "Secret". [Reset holiday] Delete the holiday set in "Set holiday". [Settings] Configure how the Calendar screen will be displayed. Default View 䋺 Configure the display format of the Calendar screen when launching Schedule. XSelect "Week view"/"Month view" Monthly view type 䋺 Select a starting day of the week from Sunday or Monday. Weekly start time 䋺 Configure the starting time displayed in the the Week view. Sub Menu on the Schedule List Screen/ Detail Screen Schedule list screen (P234)/Detail screen (P234)XM[Mene]XPerform the following operations: [Add new] Register a new Schedule event.→P232 [Send via]䋪1 Send the selected schedule events as an i-mode mail attachment or via Infrared communication. Registering To Do Tasks You can register up to 50 To Do entries. M[Menu]X (Stationery)X"To Do list"XI[New]XPerform the following operations • C[List] : Display the setting items list screen for the selected item. • When the cursor is in the due date setting field, you can stop creating a To do task by selecting M [Cancel] X "Yes". New Memo Creation Screen [ (Category)] Select the category of the To Do task. Icons vary depending on the selected category. [ (Subject)] Up to 200 full-pitch or 400 half-pitch characters can be entered. The subject is displayed on the To Do list screen. A Subject is required to register a Schedule event. [ (Summary)] Up to 20 full-pitch or 40 half-pitch characters can be entered. The summary is displayed on the Alarm screen that opens when the alarm starts. [Edit]䋪1 Edit the selected Schedule event.→P232 [Multiple choice]䋪2 You can select and delete a scheduled event set to the selected day. XPlace check marks next to the schedule events to deleteX I[Delete] X"Yes" • You can select "Mark all" or "Unmark all" from "Delete" or "Mark/Unmark" by pressing M[Menu]. [Go to date]䋪2 The Calendar for the specified day appears. Use J to move the cursor to the position in the "Enter date you Other Useful Functions Continue on the next page 235 • For To do tasks with "Status" set to "Completed", the due date and the subject are crossed out and the task appears after tasks with status other than "Completed". [ (Due date)] Set the due date of the To Do task.To set the date, use J to move the cursor to the place to change the date and enter the date with the dial keys (to set the date on the calendar screen, press C[List] in the date entry field ). Operations on the calendar screen→P234 Use J to move the cursor to the position and enter the time with dial keys and switch between "AM" and "PM" with C (pressing C in the time field opens the Time settings screen that allows you to enter time with dial keys and H). • Depending on the settings in "Date&Time format", the display order or format for the date and time may differ.→P106 Press C[List] to select the day from a calendar. b Due date and subject c Priority 䋯 䋯 "High"/"Low"/"No priority" d Icon indicating a To Do task set for other than Japan time Appears if the schedule event's "Local time zone" is set to other than "GMT+9:00". [ (Priority)] Select a priority of the task.Icons vary depending on the selected priority. [ (Status)] Select a status of the task.Icons vary depending on the selected status. When "Completed" is selected, the due date and the subject will be crossed out, and the task appears after tasks with status other than "Completed" on the To Do list screen. [ (Set alarm)] Set whether to be notified with an alarm tone at the set due date and time. If you select other than "No alarm", perform the following steps to select the alarm tone. Music 䋺 Selects the music saved in "Music" in the "Data box "folder.→P224 i-motion䋺 Select a movie/i-mode saved in "i-motion" in "Data box".→P201 Melody 䋺 Select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the "Data box".→P204 I[Done] To Do listScreen a Icon indicating a "Status" Select a To Do task to view The To DoDetail screen opens. Sub Menu on the To Do List/Detail Screen To Do list screen (P236) or To Do detail screen (P236) XM[Menu]XPerform the following operations [Add new] Create a new To Do entry.→P235 [Send via] Send the selected schedule events as i-mode mail attachment or via Infrared communication. [Edit] Edit the To Do entry.→P235 You can list and view registered To Do tasks. [Change status] Change the "Status" of the selected To Do entry.→ P235 [Multiple choice]䋪 You can select and delete To do tasks. Viewing To Do Tasks M[Menu]X list" (Stationery)X"To Do • Saved To Do tasks are listed in the order of High →low→No Priority. When two or more To Do tasks have the same level of Priority, the task with earlier due date is listed first. XPlace check marks next to To do tasks to deleteXI[delete] X"Yes" • You can also select "Mark all" or "Unmark all" from "Mark/Unmark" by pressing M[Menu]. [Delete] Delete the selected To Do entry. [Copy to microSD card] Copy the selected To Do tasks to microSD memory card. [View calendar] Display the current date of the calendar. 䋪䋺 Not displayed on the Detail screen. 236 Other Useful Functions Remembering Dates M[Menu]X (Stationery)X "Remembering dates"X"Date counter" XI[Add]XPerform the following operation Managing Anniversaries You can display the number of days until an important event on the Stand-by screen or find the number of days quickly by using the Date counter and Date search. Date Counter Registering in Date Counter Date Counter Screen Up to 30 important events can be tracked for remaining days. a Counter display Display with - : Show the elapsed days from the set date to today. Display with + : Show the remaining days from today to the set date. b Icon to display on the Stand-by display An event that is to be displayed on the Standby screen. Select an event to find the days • The Event detail screen opens. To display the remaining days on the Stand-by display You can select one of the registered events and show the days remaining until that event on the Stand-by display. Perform the following steps from the "Date counter" screen to display the remaining days: Category and X Move the cursor to the remaining days for an event X M [Menu] X event "Display on stand-by screen" Sub Menu on the Date Counter List/Detail Screen list/detail Date counter screen (P237)XM [Menu]X list/detail Perform the following operations [Add new] Save a new event.→P237 [Edit] Edit the selected event.→P237 [Display day on stand-by screen/Cancel displaying]䋪 Specify whether to show the Date counter for the selected event on the Stand-by display. Other Useful Functions 237 [Multiple Choice]䋪 You can select and delete events. XPlace check marks next to events to deleteXI[delete] X"Yes" • You can also select "Mark"*, "Mark all"*, "Unmark"*, "Unmark all"* from "Delete" or "Mark/Unmark" by pressing M[Menu]. 䋪䋺 Items displayed vary depending on the status of an event. M [Menu] (for 1+ seconds) X select [Menu 9] X I[Add] The "Add new" screen opens. 䂓 To change the assigned function Select the function to re-assign X press I [Edit] Select a function Select an unused menu locationXI [Add] [Delete] Delete the selected ivent Date counter. 䋪䋺 Not displayed on the Detail screen. Applications that can be registered to the Custom menu are listed. Using Date Search You can find the date (year, month, date) when the designated days passed. For example, you can easily find the date 100 days after today. You can check out the date up to 9999 days after today. M[Menu]X (Stationery)X"Remembe ring dates"X"Date search"XPerform the following operations • I[Reset] : Reset the set value. Select applications • You cannot select already registered applications. Using the Custom Menu The Stand-by screen X M [Menu] (for 1+ seconds) [Start Date] Specify the date to start searching. Use J and dial keys to enter the date. [After] Enter the number of days after the start date using dial key. For example, to find the date 100 days after "Start Date", enter "100". The selected function will be registered in the Custom menu. • A currently registered function cannot be registered again. • You can also perform the following steps: M [Menu] X I [Custom] Select a function to launch Custom Menu Screen [Result] Show the date when the designated days passed. Sub Menu on the Custom Menu Screen Custom Menu Quick Access to Frequently Used Applications Default Check new message, Inbox, Date counter, Calculator, Alarm, Touchpad settings You can quickly access frequently used functions by saving them to the Custom menu. Creating the Custom Menu You can save up to 10 frequently used functions to the Custom menu.You can also change the default functions. Ex: When you assign a function to unregistered custom menu item [Menu 9] 238 Other Useful Functions Custom menu screen (P238)XM [Menu]XPerform the following operations [Add new]䋪1 Add applications selected from the list.→P238 [Open]䋪2 Launch the selected application. [Edit]䋪2 Edit registered applications. [Delete]䋪2 Delete the selected application. [Delete all] Delete all registered applications. XC[OK] 䋪1䋺 Appears when an unused menu location is selected. 䋪2䋺 Appears when a registered application is selected. Own Number Registering Your Name and Image [Reset] Delete all registered information of personal data. Checking Call Duration/ Call Cost You can store your personal information in the FOMA handset. M[Menu]X (Own number)XC [Detail]XEnter the security code The Own number detail screen opens. M[Menu]X"Edit" The Edit own number screen opens. Enter informationXI[Done] For steps to register, see Step 2 (P77) "Saving FOMA Handset Phonebook (Phone) Contacts". However, you cannot set secret data. • The pre-installed own number cannot be changed or deleted. Note • If you change a mail address in i-mode, the address saved to this function will not be updated automatically. Sub Menu on the Own Number Detail Screen Own number detail screen (P239)X M[Menu]XPerform the following operations [Mail/URL] Create a mail and access to a site with the saved address information. Compose 䋺 Creates an i-mode mail addressed to mail other than own number or own address. Attach to 䋺 Create an i-mode mail with Own number mail info. attached in vCard file format. Compose 䋺 Creates a SMS message addressed to SMS other than Own number. Connect to䋺 Connects to the saved URL. URL [Edit] You can edit the Own number detail screen.→P239 [Send Ir data] Send information from your Own number detail screen via infrared communication. [Copy to microSD card] Copy information from your Own number detail screen to the microSD memory card. [Customize call] Change a saved number other than own number and makes a call using the updated number. You can save the phone number to the Phonebook using C[Save]. XL on the Phone number entry screen XK to move the cursor to the area to modify X Change the phone number XA You can check the last and accumulated call durations and costs of voice and video calls. • Voice call duration and digital communication duration (video call duration) are displayed for Call duration. Call duration includes both incoming and outgoing calls. • Call cost includes only outgoing calls. However, calls made to toll free numbers or the information number (104) have "0 YEN" or "䋪䋪 YEN" displayed. • Call costs are stored in the UIM. When a different UIM is used, the stored call costs appear (storing started in December, 2004). 㶎䋺 FOMA handsets released before the 901i Series cannot display the call costs stored on a UIM (call costs are stored on the UIM). • The displayed call duration and call cost can be reset. • The displayed call duration and cost are approximate values and may be different from actual ones. Note that call cost does not include the consumption tax. Note • The call duration/cost for i-mode communication and packet communication is not included. For checking i-mode usage charges, refer to "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]" which is supplied on your i-mode contract. Call duration Checking Call Duration You can check the duration of the previous and accumulated duration of voice and video calls. M[Menu] X duration" (Phonebook) X"Call [Last call] Display duration of the latest call. [Received calls] Display the total duration of incoming calls from the last reset to now. [Dialed calls] Display the total duration of outgoing calls from the last reset to now. [All calls] Display the total duration of calls from the last reset to now. Other Useful Functions 239 Note • The displayed Call duration returns to 0 (zero) seconds and starts counting when the duration exceeds 99hours59minutesand59seconds. • The ringing and dialing durations are not counted. To reset individual item for "Call duration" settings Move the cursor to the item to resetXI[Reset]XEnter the terminal security codeXSelect "Yes" To reset all items for "Call duration" settings You can reset all items at one time. XM[Menu]X[Reset all]XEnter the terminal security codeXSelect "Yes" Total Call Cost M[Menu]X (Phonebook)X"Call cost"X"Set call cost limit" Enter the security codeXPerform the following operations [Set limit] Set whether to limit the cost of calls. [Call cost limit] Set a limit on the cost of calls. [Notification] Select how to indicate that the cost of calls has reached the limit. 䋺 Not notify. Off Sound+Icon 䋺 Notify using the call cost icon + the call cost tone. Icon 䋺 Notify using the call cost icon. Checking Call Cost If the limit is exceeded The call cost icon is shown on the Stand-by display. When you set "Set call cost limit" to "Sound+Icon", the call cost tone sounds after the call that broke the limit. Call cost includes only outgoing calls. M[Menu]X (Phonebook)X"Call cost"XTotal Call Cost To hide the Call cost icon You can delete on the screen. XM[Menu]X (Phonebook)X"Call cost" X"Delete call cost icon" [Last voice call cost] Display the previous call cost. [Last video call cost] Display the previous video call cost. [Total call cost] Display the total cost of calls from the last reset to now. World Clock [Reset date&time] Display the last reset date and time. Using the World Clock You can view the date and time in major world cities stored in the FOMA handset. Note • International call costs to use WORLD CALL are counted. Call costs to use other international telephone services are not counted. Resetting Total Call Cost M[Menu]X (Phonebook)X"Call cost"XTotal Call Cost M[Menu]X Clock" (Stationery)X"World • C[Change]: Change the selected city.The World time setting screen opens. I[Reset]XEnter PIN2X"Yes" Set call cost limit Setting a Call Cost Limit Default Off Save the value of the maximum of total call cost to prevent further expenditure. World Clock List Screen a Home icon * The home city set in the World Clock is associated with the city set in "Local time zone". Changing the city in one setting changes the other city automatically. Therefore, you cannot change the Home city if "Auto time set" in "Set Date&Time" is set to "On". b The currently specified city and time 240 Other Useful Functions b I[Add] Unit Converter • C[List]: Open the list of cities and select. Press M[Prev.] or I[Next] to switch the city name list by page. Using the Unit Converter You can convert the units for measuring currency, area, length, weight, temperature, volume, and speed. Converting Currency Units World Clock Setting Screen This option is useful when you exchange yen to dollars. a The selected city name, date, and time Setting the Exchange Rate b Date and time of Home (own country) Press J to select a city to add The selected city is added to the World clock list screen. Before converting, set the exchange rate. M[Menu]X (Stationery)X"Unit converter"X"Currency" Sub Menu of the World Clock List Screen World clock list screen (P240) XM [Menu]XPerform the following operations [Change home city]䋪1 Change the city set as Home. [Change City]䋪2 Changes the selected city. Currency Select the currency unit fieldXM [Rate] [Daylight Saving]䋪1 Set whether to use Daylight savings time. X +1 hour"/"+2 hours" [Analog Clock On/Analog Clock Off] Set whether to display the analog clock on the World clock list screen. ὑᦧ䊧 䊷䊃 ⸳ቯ↹㕙 [Delete]䋪2 Delete a selected city. [Delete all]䋪2 Delete all cities except the Home city. 䋪1䋺 This option cannot be selected when "Auto time set" is set to "On". 䋪2䋺 This option is not displayed when the home city is selected. Stopwatch Using the Stopwatch You can use the FOMA handset as a stopwatch. M[Menu]X (Lifekit)X"Stopwatch" • C[Start]/[Stop] : Start or stop counting. • I[Reset] : Reset the counted result. • I[Lap]: Each time you press this key, the lap time at that moment will be shown at the bottom of the screen. Perform the following operation • C[List] : List of the items is displayed. [Currency name field] Press C [Select] to change the currency name. Up to 7 full-pitch or 15 half-pitch characters can be entered. "YEN" in the top row cannot be changed. [Exchange rate field] Set the exchange rate. Up to 10 digits (including the decimal point) can be entered. Up to 2 digits can be entered after the decimal point. For example, to exchange between US dollars and yen (example: one US dollar is 120 yen), set 120 to "YEN" and 1 to "USD". • M䌛 䊶 䌝 䋯# : Enter a decimal point. • Q : Delete from the last entered digit. I[Done] Convert Currencies Convert the one currency to another based on the rates set for those two currencies. Other Useful Functions 241 a Select two currencies from the Currency unit field in the Currency conversion screen (P241). Converting Temperature Units • C[List]: The Currency list screen opens. You can convert temperature between Fahrenheit and Celsius. Enter the amount in the value entry field of the source currency The converted amount will be displayed in the other value entry field.You can enter/convert in either value entry field. • Up to 10 digits (including the decimal point) can be entered.However, if the converted value exceeds 14 digits (including the decimal point) or 2,147,483,647, no more digits can be entered. • If the currency in the Currency unit field is changed after the amount was entered, the new amount will be displayed in the lower value entry field using the amount in the upper value entry field as the source. • # : Enter the decimal point. • Q : Delete from the last entered digit. • I[Reset]: Delete all entered numbers. Converting Area Units Convert one defined area unit to another type of defined area unit. M[Menu]X (Stationary)X"Unit converter"X"Temperature"XEnter temperature either in "Celsius" or "Fahrenheit" The converted temperature will be displayed in the other value entry field. You can enter/convert in either value entry field. • From -40 to 309, or up to 10 digits (including – (minus) and the decimal point) can be entered. • M[-]: Enter - (minus) before the value. • # : Enter the decimal point. • Q: Delete from the last entered digit. • I[Reset]: Delete all entered numbers. Converting Length, Weight, Temperature, Volume, and Speed Units M[Menu]X (Stationery)X"Unit converter"X"Length"/"Weight"/ "Temperature"/"Volume"/"Velocity" M[Menu]X (Stationery)X"Unit converter"X"Surface" Perform the same steps as in "Converting Area Units" (P242). Calculator Using the Calculator Area unit conversion screen Select a unit in the Surface unit field (two places) You can use the Calculator to perform arithmetic operations, memory calculations, percentage calculations, etc. M[Menu]X • C[Unit]: The unit list screen opens. Enter the value in the value entry field of the source surface Calculator The converted value will be displayed in the other value entry field.You can enter/convert in either value entry field. • The description of the values is the same as for the Currency conversion screen. a Keyboard Press the dial keys, #, or * to operate. b Arithmetic operation (+, -, X, ˜ (/)): Press K, C to operate. 242 Other Useful Functions (Stationery)X"Calculator" Calculating • • • • * : Enter a decimal point. # : Enter ( ) parentheses. Q : Delete from the last entered digit. I[AC] : Clear all entered numbers and calculated results. Sub Menu on the Calculator Screen Calculator screen (P242)XM[Func.] XPerform the following operations [䋫䋯䋭] Switch the sign (+/-) of the entered number. [sin] Calculate the tangent of an angle. [ (Category)] Select a type (category) of Memo.Icons vary depending on the selected category. [ (Subject)] Enter a memo. Up to 50 full-pitch or 100 half-pitch characters can be entered. A blank memo cannot be registered. [cos] Calculate the tangent of an angle. I[Done] Viewing a Memo [tan] Calculate the tangent of an angle. You can list and view registered memos. [log] Calculate the logarithm of a number. M[Menu]X (Stationery)X"Memo" [ln] Calculate the natural logarithm of a number. Calculate the natural logarithm of the specified positive value (logarithm with the base of e). [exp] Calculate the value of a number raised to an exponential level. [sqrt] Calculate the square root of a number. Memo List Screen [deg] Set the unit of angle to "degree". [rad] Set the unit of angle to "radian". Radian expresses an angle using the constant number 㱜(180 degrees equal䊶 adians).䇭 One radian (360 degrees/2㱜) is approximately 57.29578 degrees. One degree (2㱜/360 degrees) is approximately 0.01745 radian (where 㱜=3.141592653). Memos The Memo detail screen opens. • C[Edit] : The new memo creation screen opens. • I[Mail] : Compose message screen on which the contents of "Category" and "Memo" are inserted in the body opens. Sub Menu on the Memo List Screen/Memo Detail Screen Memo list screen (P243)/Detail screen (P243)XM[Mene]XPerform the following operations: Using Memos [Add new] Register a new Memo.→P243 Creating Memos [Send via] Send the selected memo as an i-mode mail attachment or via Infrared communication. Also, you can send all memo via Infrared communication. Create and save a memo. Up to 30 memos can be registered. Select a memo to view M[Menu]X (Stationery)X"Memo"X I[New]XPerform the following operations [Edit] Edit the selected Memo.→P243 [Delete] Delete the selected Memo. [Multiple choice]䋪 Select and delete memos. • C[List] : List of the items is displayed. XPlace check marks next to memo to deleteXI[delete] X"Yes" • You can also select "Mark all" or "Unmark all" from "Mark/Unmark" by pressing M[Menu]. New Memo Creation Screen Other Useful Functions 243 Note [Copy to microSD card]䋪 Copy the selected Memo to the microSD memory card. • When using the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch, a call will not be terminated when the handset is closed during the call. 䋪䋺 Not displayed on the Detail screen. Talking Using the flat-plug earphone/ microphone with switch You can connect an flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch (optional) to the FOMA handset to make and receive calls. Configuring Switch Actions Default [Switch call] : Off Specify the party to call using a memory number of the Phonebook in the FOMA handset when connecting the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch. M[Menu]X (Settings)X"Call/VT/ Dialing"X"Earphone"XPerform the following operations Making a Call Using the Switch Press the switch of the flat-plug earphone/ microphone with switch to make a voice call to the number assigned to the memory number of the Phonebook set under the Earphone setting. Press the switch of the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch three times. To disconnect the call, press the switch of the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch (for 1+ seconds) Receiving a Call Using the Switch A call arrives XPress the switch of the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch Answer the call. • When a video call arrives, the camera image is sent to the other party. Earphone Setting Screen [Switch call] Select "On" to enable making calls by pressing the switch of the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch. [Memory number] Enter the memory number from the Phonebook. This option can be selected from the Phonebook search screen by pressing C[Search]. Auto Answer To disconnect the call, press the switch of the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch (for 1+ seconds) Automatically Receiving a Call Connecting the flat-plug earphone/ microphone with switch Receiving an Incoming Call during a Call If Call waiting service is subscribed and activated when a voice call arrives during another voice call, you can answer the second call by pressing the switch of the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch. A call arrivesXPress the switch of the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch The active voice call is placed on hold and you can answer the incoming call. 244 I[Done] Default Auto answering: Off You can set to receive a call automatically when the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch is connected after the set ring time has elapsed. M[Menu]X (Settings)X"Call/VT/ Dialing"X"Incoming voice call"X"Auto answer"XPerform the following operations To disconnect the call, press the switch of the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch (for 1+ seconds) Other Useful Functions Auto Answer Setting Screen Memory status [Auto answering] Select "On" to enable receiving calls automatically using the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch. [Delayed time] Enter the time until the call is automatically received. I[Done] Note • When the Voice mail service, Call forwarding service, or Record message is activated, Auto answer is not available to receive a video call with the FOMA handset closed. • If the Auto Answer ring time is set to the same or shorter duration as the Voice mail or Call forwarding service, or Record message, this function takes precedence. However, if the ring time is set to the same duration as the response time in Record message, this function starts when the set ring tone sounds or the handset vibrates twice before the response time. Checking Memory Usage You can check used and free space of the FOMA handset memory. If a microSD memory card is inserted, you can also check the usage of the microSD memory card. • The space used in the FOMA handset includes the files/data for the following functions - Data box (My Pictures, i-motion, Melody, and Music) - Phonebook - Schedule - Holiday - Memo - To Do - Date search M[Menu]X (Settings)X"Other"X "Memory status" Memory Status Screen Hour Indication Chiming the Hour Default Set sound : Off Select a memory to view X "Data box memory"/"Personal info."/"UIM memory"/"microSD memory" Set whether to sound a tone each hour, on the hour. Databox memory䋺 Show the capacity of the "Data Personal info.䋺 Show the amount of saved data in box". M[Menu]X (Settings)X"Date&time" X"Hour indication"XPerform the following operations the Phonebook, Schedule, Holiday, Memo, To do, and Date counter. UIM memory䋺 Show the memory status of the UIM. [Set sound] Specify the tone. microSD memory䋺 <*StepCLnHLead2l>Show the memory status of the microSD memory card. X"Off"/"Sound 1"/"Sound 2"/"Sound 3" Press C [List] to open the Set sound list screen. Press J to hear the selected sound. From the list screen, press I [Play] X H to hear the sound. [Set time] Set the time to sound the tone. Use J to move the cursor to the position and enter the time with dial keys and switch betweenssssssssss "AM" and "PM" with C (pressing C in the time field opens the Time settings screen that allows you to enter time with dial keys and H). • Depending on the settings in "Date&Time format", the display order or format for the date and time may differ. P106 I[Done] Reset/Clear Restoring Various Function Settings to Their Defaults You can restore the settings of various functions to the defaults. • For functions that can be restored to the defaults, see the "Menu List" (P282). M[Menu]X (Settings)X"Other"X "Reset/Clear"X"Reset settings"X "Yes"XEnter the security code Other Useful Functions 245 Note • Perform "Reset settings" only when the battery level is sufficient to complete the task. • While resetting, applications/communications are not available • After performing "Reset settings" , the ticker of the i-Channel will not appear. When the information is automatically updated, or you download the latest information by pressing Q for 1+ seconds, the ticker reappears automatically. Clear memory Deleting All Saved Data at Once Delete the saved data. M[Menu]X (Settings)X"Other"X "Reset/Clear"X"Clear memory" Check off the items to be deleted X I[Done] X "Yes" X Enter the security code Pre-installed data䋺 Delete default data in "Data box". User-defined data䋺 Delete all data other than default data in "Data box". PIM data䋺 Delete data in the "Phonebook" and "Stationery". To delete data saved on the microSD memory card You can delete all data saved on the microSD memory card. X M[Menu] X (Settings) X "Others" X "Reset/Clear" X "Clear microSD" X "Yes" X Enter the security code Note • The total call duration and total call cost will not be deleted. • Protected data is also deleted. • Data saved in the FOMA handset will not be deleted. • Some files that is used as default data or used for default settings are not deleted. 246 Other Useful Functions Entering Text Character Input.................................................................................................................. Entering Characters.......................................................................................................... Configuring Character Input Settings ....................................................... Input Setting Modifying/Registering Common Phrases.................................................................Edit Copying/Cutting and Pasting Characters ....................................................................... Using the Kuten Code to Enter Characters ...................................... Kuten Code Input Registering Frequently Used Words ............................................................... Edit word Initializing Learned Data...................................................................... Reset Learnt Info Using Downloaded Dictionaries ...................................................Download Dictionary 248 249 251 251 252 253 253 253 254 247 Entering Pictographs/ Symbols/Emoticons Character Input Various operations require entering characters, such as registering to the Phonebook or creating mail. Learn how to enter characters to fully use the FOMA handset. Character Input Screen The Character input screen shows the current input mode and operation guide. You can switch the input modes of pictographs/ symbols/emoticons using A. • Depending on the current input screen, these characters may not be entered or modes may not be switched. Character input screen (P248) X A Each press of A switches the input mode, and the list screen opens. ⛗ 䋺 Characters input mode ⸥ 䋺 Full-pitch symbols input mode 䍕䍘䍼 䍑䋺 Half-pitch symbols input mode Character Input a Available number of characters Indicates the number of remaining characters which can be entered, in bytes. b Operation guide field Shows switching among pictographs, symbols, and emoticons, and switching between full- and half-pitch characters. c Input mode field Shows the input mode. 㗻 䋺 Emoticons input mode Move the cursor to the desired pictograph/symbol/emoticon X C [Select] The selected character will be entered. 䂓 Available Keys on the List Screen and Their Functions] Key Display list screens in the order of the screen numbers. *䋯F Display list screens in the reverse order of the screen numbers. 1䋯2䋯 Move the cursor to the left/center/right of the top row on the Pictograph/ symbol list screen. 4䋯5䋯 Move the cursor to the left/center/right of the middle row on the Pictograph/ symbol list screen. 7䋯8䋯 Move the cursor to the left/center/right of the bottom row on the Pictograph/ symbol list screen. Switch between "Pictograph1" and "Pictograph2" on the Pictograph list screen. Switching Input Modes Switch the input mode depending on the characters to enter. • In some input modes, you can switch between full and half-pitch characters. • Depending on the input screen, it may not be possible to switch input modes. Character input screen(P248), press I[Mode] I [Change]/ JXC [Select] Each press of I[Change] switches the input mode. Pressing H before C [Select] switches between full and half-pitch (excluding Hiragana or Kanji input mode). • After switching the input mode, you can enter characters in the selected input mode without pressing C [Select]. ṽ 䋺 Hiragana or Kanji characters input mode 䉦 (䍔䍣) 䋺 Katakana characters input mode a/A䋪(ab/AB䋪) 䋺 Alpabetic characters input mode 1 (12) 䋺 Numbers input mode 䋪䋺 Pressing M [Upper] changes to upper case. 248 Entering Text Description #䋯E Key Entering Characters In the Hiragana and Kanji input mode, you can enter characters using the Prediction function that predicts conversion options from the characters being entered, and the Next phrase prediction function that predicts the next phrase. • You can turn the Prediction function on or off in "Prediction" in "Input setting". • For characters that can be entered with the keys, see "Dial Keys Assignments to Characters" (P296). Example: Entering characters in the Hiragana and Kanji input mode Key Description *Toggle between upper and lower case. The key is not available for characters that cannot be toggled and in the Numeric input mode. Characters that can take a voiced symbol will be toggled after the voiced symbol is added. #䋯D Enter a line feed to characters converted or fixed. Only $D$ is available in the Numeric input mode. (1+ seconds) Restore the previous state of a character converted or fixed. X "Yes"/"No" Erase the character in front of the cursor. (1+ seconds) Erase all characters converted or fixed after the cursor. When the cursor is at the end of text, all characters will be erased. Use H to move the cursor to the conversion option field • C [Set]: Fix the entered characters. In the Hiragana and Kanji input mode, press this key to fix the characters without converting them. {0>M䌛 䉦 䊅⧷ᢙ䌝䋺 <} • M [KanaA1]: Display conversion options combined with Katakana and alphanumeric characters. • I[Conv.]: Display conversion options without using the Prediction function. Press when there is no conversion option you want to enter at the prediction option field. Entering on Character input screen(P248) Character Entry field Prediction option field Conversion options predicted by the Prediction function are displayed. • If the Prediction is set to "Off", conversion options will not appear. • Approximately 1.5 seconds after characters were entered, the cursor moves to right automatically and the entered characters are fixed (Auto cursor function). However, this function does not work in the numeric input mode. The Auto cursor function can be disabled, or the duration before characters are fixed can be changed.→P250 • Pressing R also fixes the entered characters (pressing D also fixes characters in other than the Hiragana and Kanji input mode). 䂓 The usable keys and function except for entering character Description Display the characters assigned to a key in the reverse order by pressing this key before characters are fixed. Move the cursor to the characters to convert X C [Select] The entered characters are fixed. Conversion options predicted by the Next phrase prediction function appear in the display area. If desired characters are displayed, perform Step 2 ? 3 to select and enter the characters. • Press Q to cancel conversion and to resume entering characters. Converting Characters without the Prediction Function Perform the following steps if desired characters are not shown as conversion options or if the Prediction is set to "Off": a Enter characters on the Character input screen(P280) • After entering characters, if the cursor is in the Predicted conversion option area, press Q to move the cursor to the character input area. b I[Conv.]: onversion options for the highlighted area will be displayed. • To change the highlighted area, use J to move the cursor. c Use H to move the cursor to the conversion option display area d Move the cursor to the characters to convert → C [Select] The entered characters are fixed. As each phrase is converted, the next phrase will be highlighted. Entering Text 249 Entering Common Phrases Sub Menu on the Character Input Screen • Displayed items vary depending on the options or entered characters on the Character input screen. Character input screen (P248)XM [Menu]XPerform the following operations [Common phrases] Select and enter a saved common phrase. 䋺 Select and enter a saved common Fixed sentence phrase. Edit You can enter text using common phrases saved in the FOMA handset. • As a default, "Original-1" and "Original-2" are empty. The selecting of the Common phrase type screen appears. Note • Common phrases can be edited/registered. →P251 • Common phrase list →P300 [Edit character] Copy or cut characters specifying a range and paste. Go to Step 2 (P252) in "Copying/Cutting and Pasting Characters". [Edit word] Register a word. → P253 [Quote] Phonebook 䋺 Quote an entry to the Phonebook. Own number 䋺 Quote your phone number. The security code is required to quote. Bar Code Reader 䋺 Quote information scanned with the bar code reader. [Input setting] Full/Half 䋺 Switch between full-/half-pitch input mode. Upper/Lower 䋺 Switch between upper/lower case input mode in the Alphabetic mode Prediction 䋺 Activate or deactivate the prediction function. → P251 Auto cursor 䋺 Set whether to automatically fix the entered characters and move the cursor. → P251 [Special input] 䋺 Enter a space before the cursor. Space Line Feed 䋺 Enter a linefeed before the cursor. Kuten code 䋺 Enter a character using its Kuten code. → P253 䋺 Select and enter a pictograph from a Pictograph list. 䋺 Select and enter a full-pitch symbol Full symbol from a list. 䋺 Select and enter a half-pitch symbol Half symbol from a list. 䋺 Select and enter an emoticon from a Emoticon list. Select a type X Select a common phrase The common phrase is entered. 䋺 You can create and save a common phrase, or edit a saved common phrase. → P251 250 Character input screen (P248) XM [Menu] X "Common phrases"X "Fixed sentence" Entering Pictographs/Symbols/ Emoticons You can switch the input modes of pictographs/ symbols/emoticons using A. • Depending on the current input screen, these characters may not be entered or modes may not be switched. Character input screen (P248) XA Each press of A switches the input mode, and the list screen opens. ⛗䇭 䋺 Characters input mode ⸥䇭 䋺 Full-pitch symbols input mode 䍕䍘䍼 䍑 䋺 Half-pitch symbols input mode ⛗ᢥሼ৻ⷩ↹㕙 㗻䇭 䋺 Emoticons input mode Move the cursor to the desired pictograph/symbol/emoticon XC [Select] The selected character will be entered. 䂓 Available Keys on the List Screen and Their Functions Key Description #䋯E Display list screens in the order of the screen numbers. [Cancel] Erase all entered characters. *䋯F Display list screens in the reverse order of the screen numbers. 䋪䋺 Use A to switch the input screen.→P248 1䋯2䋯3 Move the cursor to the left/center/ right of the top row on the Pictograph/symbol list screen. Entering Text Key Description 4䋯5䋯6 Move the cursor to the left/center/ right of the middle row on the Pictograph/symbol list screen. 7䋯8䋯9 Move the cursor to the left/center/ right of the bottom row on the Pictograph/symbol list screen. Switch between "Pictograph1" and "Pictograph2" on the Pictograph list screen. 䂓 Entering Pictographs/Symbols/Emoticons Consecutively Characters of each input mode can be consecutively entered. XEach input mode screen I [Cont.] X select characters consecutively X I [Set] Fixing Entered Characters Automatically Default Character input screen(P248)M [Menu] X "Input setting" X "Auto cursor" X Select the duration Off 䋺 Characters are not automatically fixed. Slow䋺 Characters are fixed approximately two seconds after being entered. Normal䋺 Characters are fixed approximately one and a half seconds after being entered. Fast䋺 Characters are fixed approximately one second after being entered. Note • Symbol and Special Characters list → P297 • Pictograph and emoticon lists→P298, P299 Edit Modifying/Registering Common Phrases Editing Emoticons a M [Menu] (Settings) X "Others" X "Character input X "Edit emotion The Edit Emoticon screen opens. b Select a category X Select an emoticon to edit XI [Edit] The character input screen opens with the selected emoticon entered. c Change the Emoticon X C[Set] The changed emoticon is overwritten and saved. Input Setting Configuring Character Input Settings Normal You can configure the input method so that the input characters are automatically fixed after the timeout you set, then the cursor moves to a new position for the next input. Register frequently used greetings or phrases as common phrases to enter them quickly. Registering Common Phrases Newly defined common phrases can be saved in "Original-1" or "Original-2". Up to eight common phrases can be saved to each folder. Character input screen(P248) M [Menu]X"Common phrases"X"Edit" The common phrase types are listed. Configure various settings related to character input. Set Prediction Default Turn On/Off the Prediction function that displays conversion options predicted to succeed entered Hiragana characters. Edit Common Phrase List Screen On Character input screen(P248) M [Menu] X "Input setting" X "Prediction" X "ON"/"OFF" "Original-1"/"Original-2"X Move the cursor to a position to add the phrase to X I[Edit] Up to 64 full-pitch or 128 half-pitch characters can be entered. Note • You can also set the Prediction input by performing the following steps: M[Menu]X (Settings) X"Others" X "Character input" X"Prediction input" X"On"/ "Off" Edit Common Phrase screen Entering Text 251 c Enter text to register XC [Set] The common phrase is registered. Editing Pre-installed Common Phrases You can edit a pre-installed common phrase. Character input screen(P248) M[Menu]X"Common phrases"X "Edit"XSelect a common phrase type [Reset 1 item]䋪1 Restore the selected common phrase to its default. [Category reset]䋪2 Restore all common phrases in the category to their defaults. [Cancel] End editing a common phrase. 㶎1䋺 A common phrase whose type is "Original-1" or "Original-2". Cannot be selected. 㶎2䋺 Not displayed in the sub menu for full screen Common phrases. Copying/Cutting and Pasting Characters "Greeting" Common Phrase List Screen Move the cursor to a phrase XC[Edit] The Common phrase edit screen opens with the selected common phrase entered. • Press M[Select] to open the full screen with the common phrase entered. Character input screen (P248) X M [Menu] X "Edit character" X "Copy"/ "Cut" Edit the common phrase XC[Set] Use Kto move the cursor to the starting point X C[Select] The common phrase is registered. Note • You can also edit common phrases saved in a user-defined folder. • You can also perform the following steps to save or edit a common phrase. M[Menu]X (Settings)X"Others"X"Charac ter input"X"Edit common phrase" Common Phrase Edit Screen Sub Menu The Edit common phrase screen (P251) XM [Menu] X perform the following operations: Reset all Restore all common phrases to their defaults. Cancel Terminate editing a common phrase. Sub Menu on the Common Phrase List/ Display All Screen Common phrase list screen (P252) X M[Menu]XPerform the following operations [Delete 1 item] Delete the selected common phrase. 252 You can copy/cut characters and paste them to other locations or on other screens. Copied/cut characters can be pasted any number of times until the FOMA handset is turned off or different characters are copied/cut. Entering Text Use Kto move the cursor to the ending point X C[Select] Open the character input destination screen X Use Kto move the cursor to the position to paste M[Menu] X "Edit character" X "Paste" X "Yes" • To undo a cut or paste operation, select M[Menu] X "Edit character" X "Undo" Note • If copied or cut text contains more characters than the allowable number of characters, the excess characters are deleted when pasted. • Characters can be pasted only if copied or cut text can be entered in the destination text. For example, Hiragana or Kanji characters cannot be pasted in the mail address field (half-pitch alphanumeric characters). • Line feeds in a copied text string are replaced with half-pitch spaces if the text is pasted to an input screen that does not allow linefeeds. Kuten Code Input Using the Kuten Code to Enter Characters You can enter a 4-digit Kuten Code to enter characters, numeric symbols, etc. • For the "Kuten Code List", refer to the "Kuten Code List" on the included CD-ROM in PDFformat [Word] Enter the word to register. Up to 20 full-pitch or 40 halfpitch characters can be entered. On the Character input screen, after the characters of a "Reading" are entered, the registered word appears as a conversion option. Character input screen (P248) XM [Menu] X "Special input" X "Kuten code" I[Store] The word is registered to the dictionary. Note • You can also perform the following steps to register a word. (Settings) X "Others" X X M[Menu] X "Character input" X "Edit word" Deleting Words Kuten Code Input Screen Enter the Kuten code (4-digit number) for the character XC [Select] The associated character is entered. • You can also select characters by moving the cursor with K. 䂓 Entering Kuten Codes Consecutively You can enter consecutive characters using Kuten codes. X Kuten code input screen I [Cont.] X select characters consecutively XI[Set] You can delete one word or all words registered using "Edit dictionary". Example: Deleting one word Move the cursor to the world to delete on the Stored word list screen (P253) M[Menu]X"Delete 1 item" X "Yes" The selected word will be deleted. 䂓 To delete all words Select M [Menu] X "Delete all" X "Yes" on the Stored word list screen. Reset Learnt Info Initializing Learned Data Edit word Registering Frequently Used Words You can register up to 100 words not listed as conversion options, or words with difficult readings, along with the readings. Registered words will be displayed as conversion options when the readings are entered. Character input screen (P248) XM [Menu] X "Edit word" The Registered word list screen opens. • To view registered words, select a dictionary and press C. Restore the learned data concerning character entry saved in the FOMA handset to its default. M[Menu] X (Settings) X "Others" X "Character input" X "Reset learnt info" X "Yes"/"No" Learned Data Learned data consists of recorded characters entered and converted by selecting from conversion options, or characters fixed by pressing C without conversion. The next time you enter the same first character, the learned word appears as the first conversion option. I[Add] X Select or save the following item [Reading] Enter the reading that is used to find the registered word. Up to 20 full-pitch Hiragana characters only can be entered. Entering Text 253 Download Dictionary Using Downloaded Dictionaries You can enable dictionaries downloaded from i-mode sites, etc. and use them for character conversion. Up to five dictionaries can be enabled. • Up to ten dictionaries can be stored in the FOMA handset. M[Menu] X (Settings) X "Others" X "Character input" X "Download dictionary" (Image to be added) Downloaded Dictionary Screen Place a check mark next to a dictionary to enable X C[Enable] The dictionary is enabled. 䂓 To disable a dictionary Select an enabled dictionary and press C [Disable]. Downloading dictionaries You can download dictionaries from the following site: Sub Menu on the Downloaded Dictionary Screen Downloaded dictionary screen (P254) X M[Menu] X Perform the following operations • I[View] : Display details of the dictionary. [Delete 1 item] Delete the selected dictionary. [Delete all] Delete all listed dictionaries. 254 Entering Text Network Services Network Services Available ............................................................................................. Voice Mail Service............................................................................................Voice Mail Call Waiting....................................................................................................Call Waiting Call Forwarding Service ......................................................................... Call forwarding Nuisance Call Blocking .............................................................Nuisance Call Blocking Caller ID Notification Service ........................................................ Caller ID Notification Caller ID Request .................................................................................Caller ID Request Set In-call Arrival Act .................................................................... Set In-call Arrival Act Selecting Reaction to Incoming Call during a Call ...........................In-call Arrival Act Dual Network .............................................................................................. Dual Network English Guidance................................................................................ English Guidance Service Numbers.................................................................................. Service Numbers Setting Remote Control ......................................................................... Remote Control Multi Number .............................................................................................. Multi Number Using OFFICEED ............................................................................................................... Registering and Using Service ....................Additional Services (USSD Registration) Registering Additional Guidance ................................................. Additional Guidance 256 256 257 259 259 260 260 260 261 261 261 262 262 262 250 263 264 This manual describes overview of network services through operations of FOMA handset menus. For details, refer to "Mobile Phone User's Guide [Network services]". 255 Voice Mail Network Services Available Voice Mail Service The following DoCoMo network services are available on the FOMA handset: For descriptions and usage of each service, see the pages listed in the table below. • You cannot use network services while out of service area or where there are no signals received. • For details, refer to "Mobile Phone User's Guide[Network services]". • For subscription or inquiry, contact the "DoCoMo Information Center" listed on the back of this manual. Service name Subscripti on Monthly charge Refere nce Voice mail service Required Charged P256 Call waiting Required Charged P257 Call Forwarding Service Required Free Nuisance Call Blocking service Required Free Caller ID Not notification service required Free Caller ID Request service Not required Free Dual Network service Required Charged English guidance Not required Free Multi number Required Charged Public Mode (Drive Mode) Not required Free Public Mode (Power OFF) Not required Free OFFICEED Required Charged P259 P259 P260 P260 P261 P261 P262 P68 P250 Note • "Deactivate" does not mean canceling the contract of a service such as Voice mail or Call forwarding service. • This manual describes overview of network services through operations of FOMA handset menus. For details, refer to "Mobile Phone User's Guide [Network services]". • Network service is also available overseas. →P278 • When a new network service is provided from DoCoMo, it can be registered to the menu. (Additional Services) →P263 Network Services Basic Flow of Voice Mail Service Step 1 : Set to activate the service Step 2 : Receive a call䋪 Step 3 : Caller records a message Step 4 : Replays message 䋪䋺 When you are in a hurry, you may want to record a message without Response Greeting of Voice mail service. In such a case, you can immediately start message recording mode by pressing #. Note P70 For services requiring subscription, contact "DoCoMo Information Center" on the back of this manual. 256 When your handset is out of service area or switched off, or you cannot answer a call, this service automatically responds to incoming voice/ video calls and records messages. • Up to 3 minutes can be recorded per voice message, and messages can be recorded for up to 20 voice calls and 20 video calls. Messages are retained at the center for up to 72 hours. • When a message is recorded, (with the number of received messages) appears at the Stand-by display. However, a video message is recorded, does not appear at the Stand-by display but Incoming mail information(SMS) notifies you of the messages. • When Record Message (P71) is activated concurrently, to use the Voice mail service first, set the ringing time of the Voice mail service shorter than the Response Time of Record Message. • If you do not answer an incoming voice or video call when the Voice mail service is activated, the call is recorded as a "Missed Call" in Received Calls and the Missed call notification screen opens. • When you are in the service area or FOMA handset is ON in Step 2, a ring tone sounds until Ringing Time set elapses. When an incoming call is not answered while a ring tone is sounding, it is connected to Voice mail service center. The ring time can be changed. • When a message is recorded in Step 3, appears at the Stand-by display and missed call history is stored in Received Calls. • Even the Voice mail service is disabled, you can forward an incoming voice call to the Voice mail center manually using the sub menu.→P66 • To change the setting to connect video calls to the Voice mail service, make a voice call to "1412". Using Voice Mail Service • Up to 5 received calls are provided by 1 missedcall notification. • Even when you activate "SMS৻ᜎุ (Reject All SMS)", the notification will be received. • Charges do not apply for setting or receiving the notification (through SMS). [Active voice mail] Activate the Voice mail service. [Set ring time] Set time before connecting to Voice mail service center after receiving a call. Call Waiting Call Waiting [Deactivate voice mail] Deactivate the Voice mail service. [Play messages] Play back the recorded voice mail message. [Voice mail setting] Make a call to Voice mail service center and change the settings according to the voice guidance. [Check messages] Check if new messages are arrived or not. [Notify missed call] Through SMS, notify you of the missed calls arrived while the handset is turned off or out of service area. You obtain the notification next time the handset is turned on or moves into the service area. Activate missed 䋺 Activate the "Notify missed call" call notification service. 䋺 Deactivate the "Notify missed call" Deactivate missed call service. notification Check missed 䋺 Check the status of the "Notify call notification missed call" setting. setting [Delete voice mail icon] Delete in the icon area. [Tone/Vibration message notification] Activate or deactivate the ring tone when receiving a new message. Subsequently, follow the voice guidance. Note M[Menu] X (Service) X "Voice mail" X Perform the following operations [Check voice mail setting] Check the current setting of "Voice mail". PressM[Menu] to select to activate/deactivate the Voice mail service or to set a ring time. ":2001" is enteredXA When a call arrives during another call, a call termination during a call sounds. You can place the active call on hold and answer the other call. Or, you can place the active call on hold to make another call. • To use the "Call waiting" service, set "In-call arrival act" (P261) to "Answer" in advance. If this option is set otherwise, a voice call that arrives during another voice call cannot be answered even if the "Call waiting" service is activated. • The caller continues to be charged call fee during call hold. • The Call waiting service is not available if: - Dialing a number or ringing the other party - A voice call arrives during a video call - A video call arrives during a voice call Using Call Waiting M[Menu] X (Service)X"Call waiting"XPerform the following operations [Activate call waiting] Activate the "Call waiting" service. [Deactivate call waiting] Deactivate the "Call waiting" service. [Check call waiting setting] Check the whether the "Call waiting" service is activated or deactivated. Notify Missed Call "Notify missed call" is a service that notifies you through SMS of received calls arrived while the handset is out of service area or turned off. When you move into the service area or the handset is turned on, the short message is sent to you. • This cannot be operated from a menu. • For details, refer to "Mobile Phone User's Guide [Network services]". Network Services 257 Answering Call Putting Current Call on Hold When there is an incoming call during current Voice Call, you hear a call termination tone during a call from the Earpiece and incoming call screen opens. Receive a call XA The active voice call is placed on hold and you can answer the incoming call. A message "Connecting 3-way" is shown on the 3-way connecting screen. • I[Switch]: Each time you press this key, the active call switches to held call or vise versa. • C[Spk on/Spk off]: Toggle Hands-free On or Off. Sub Menu of the Incoming Call Screen during a Call When a call arrives during a call, press M [Menu] X perform the following operations: Voice mail*1 Connect the incoming call to the Voice mail service center. [Call rejection] Reject an incoming call and hang up. [Call forwarding]*2 Transfer an incoming call to a specified number. • P: Disconnect the active call. [End active call] Terminate the active call. A call is being received. Making a Call Putting Current Call on Hold You can make a new voice call, putting a current voice call on hold. Voice call screen (P49)XM[Menu] X "New call" X Enter a phone number XA The new call becomes active, the previous call is placed on hold, and the connecting 3-way screen opens. • To activate a call put on hold, press M[Menu] X [Switch]. • To disconnect a call put on hold, activate it with the above procedure and press P. Answering Incoming Call Terminating Current Call Answer an incoming voice call, terminating the current voice call. You can answer the call even when using the "Call waiting" service. Incoming callXM[Menu]X"End active call " A voice call termination screen opens and then the incoming voice call screen for the incoming call opens. 䂓 To answer after disconnecting a call put on hold while connecting 3-way, or to answer after terminating a call on hold M[Menu] X "End the call" X "End held call" • The held call is terminated, and you can talk to the caller of the incoming call. 258 Network Services [Silent/Unmute] Mute or unmute the current call. 㶎1䋺 Not available unless you subscribe to the Voice mail service. 㶎2䋺 Not available if you are not subscribed to the Call forwarding service or if you have not specified a forwarding number. 3-way Connecting Screen Sub Menu The 3-way connecting screen X M [Menu] X perform the following operations: [Switch] Switch between the active call and held call. [End call] Select and terminate a call. End all calls 䋺 Terminate the active call. The held call automatically becomes active. End held call 䋺 Terminate the held call. End all calls 䋺 Terminate all calls. [Silent/Unmute] Mute or unmute the current call. [Send My Info.] Create i-mode mail with own number entered in the message text.P161 [Search phonebook]* Search for a Phonebook entry.P83 㶎䋺 <*Ast:2col>This cannot be used when a call is being made from Redial or a log or while Phonebook is running.To use this function, terminate those applications from the task list screen.P231 Call forwarding Call Forwarding Service When your handset is out of service area or switched off, or a call was not answered within the set ringing time, this service forwards the voice/ video call. • Forwarded to only a Video phone conforming to 3G-324M if a video call comes in. • The subscriber to the "Call forwarding" service is changed the call cost for forwarding a call to a forwarding destination. • This service is not available with some billing plans. • When Record message (P71) is activated concurrently, to use the "Call forwarding" service first, set the ringing time of the "Call forwarding" service shorter than the "Ring time" of "Record message". • If an incoming voice or video call was not answered when the "Call forwarding" service is activated, the call is recorded as a "Missed call" in "Missed call logs" and the Missed call notification screen is displayed. Basic Flow of the "Call forwarding" Service Step 1 : Register a phone number of forwarding destination Step 2 : Set to activate the service Step 3 : Incoming call arrives Step 4 : Forward call to forwarding destination Note • When you are in the service area or the handset is turned on in Step 3, a ring tone sounds until "Ring time" you set elapses. When an incoming call is not answered while a ring tone is sounding, it is forwarded to a forwarding destination. The ring time can be changed. • When the call is forwarded in Step 4, it is recorded as a "Missed call" in "Missed call logs". • Even with the "Call forwarding" service is deactivated, an incoming call can be forwarded to a forwarding destination manually from the sub menu.→P66 • You cannot answer a call when you do not subscribe to the "Call waiting" service even if you hear a call termination tone during a call. • When a forwarded call arrives, only the caller's phone number or name is displayed. The forwarding party's information will not be displayed. Using Call Forwarding Service M[Menu] X (Service) X "Call waiting" XPerform the following operations [Activate call forwarding] Activate the "Call forwarding" service. Register the 䋺 Register a phone number of forwarding forwarding destination. Press M[Search] to number locate the destination from a Phonebook. Set ring time䋺 Set the duration of time from when the call arrives until the call is forwarded. [Deactivate call forwarding] Deactivate the "Call forwarding" service. [Register the forwarding number] Register a phone number of forwarding destination. Press M[Search] to locate the destination from a Phonebook. [Setting if forwarding number busy] Set whether to connect to Voice mail service center when the forwarding destination is busy. [Check Call Forwarding setting] Check the current setting of "Call forwarding" service. Enable or Disable Forwarding Guidance • This cannot be operated from a menu. • For details, refer to "Mobile Phone User's Guide [Network services]". Enter "1429" X A Subsequently, follow the voice guidance. Nuisance Call Blocking Nuisance Call Blocking This service rejects incoming nuisance calls. After a phone number is registered to be rejected, all incoming calls from that number will be automatically rejected, and the voice guidance is played to the caller. • Up to 30 phone numbers can be registered. • Even when a call arrives from the phone number to be rejected, the ring tone does not sound. Also, the call is not recorded in Missed call logs. M[Menu] X (Service) X "Nuisance call blocking" X Perform the following operations [Register nuisance caller] Set to reject the phone number of the last incoming call received and you talked over. Network Services 259 [Register selected number] Set to reject the phone number you selected. X"Phonebook" / "Recent call logs" / "Manually" [Delete all entries] Delete all phone numbers registered as nuisance caller. [Delete last entry] The last registered phone number is deleted. Repeat the same steps to delete one phone number from last saved one at a time. [Check the number of entries] Check the number of the rejected callers. Specifying a Phone Number to Be Rejected • This cannot be operated from a menu. • For details, refer to "Mobile Phone User's Guide [Network services]". Caller ID Request Caller ID Request This service responds a voice/video call without Caller ID, plays a voice guidance requesting to send Caller ID, and terminates the call automatically. • Calls that were not answered due to the Caller ID request are not recorded in Received Calls, and the Missed Call notification screen does not appear. M[Menu] X (Service) X "Caller ID request" X Perform the following operations [Activate caller ID request] Activate the caller ID request. [Deactivate caller ID request] Deactivate the caller ID request. [Check caller ID request setting] Check the current setting of "Caller ID request". Enter "144" X A Note Subsequently, follow the voice guidance. • This service is applicable only to calls with "User unset" set as a reason for hiding caller ID. Caller ID Notification Set In-call Arrival Act Caller ID Notification Service You can notify the other party of your caller ID (phone number) when you call. Your ID will be displayed on the screen of the other party's phone, when the party is using a digital telephony/handset. • Your Caller ID is valuable information. Be cautious about sending your Caller ID. M[Menu] X (Service) X "Caller ID notification" X Perform the following operations [Activate/Deactivate caller ID notification] Notify the party of your caller ID when you dialed last time. You need to enter network security code to configure the setting. X "Notify/No notify" [Check Caller ID notification setting] Check the current setting of "Caller ID notification". 260 Network Services Set In-call Arrival Act Activate or deactivate incoming call actions set in "In-call arrival act" Also, you can check the current settings. M[Menu] X (Service) X "Check in-call arrival act. setting" X Perform the following operations [Activate in-call arrival act] Activate the reaction set in "Arrival call act" [Deactivate in-call arrival act] Deactivate the reaction set in "Arrival call act" [Check in-call arrival act. setting] Check the current setting of "Set in-call arrival act". Note In-call Arrival Act • When switching from FOMA to mova, operate from a mova handset. Selecting Reaction to Incoming Call during a Call Default Answer You can set how to respond to an incoming voice/ video call during a call when you subscribe to the Voice mail, Call waiting, and Call forwarding services. • You cannot respond to an incoming call during a call if you do not subscribe to the Voice mail, Call waiting, and Call forwarding services. • Activate "Set in-call arrival act." to use "In-call arrival act" options. M[Menu] X (Service) X "In-call arrival act" X Perform the following operations [Answer] Respond to incoming call. Incoming call action will follow the settings of the Voice mail, Call waiting, and Call forwarding services, when they are activated. [Voice mail] The Voice mail service is used. Voice mail service comes before "Call waiting". [Call forwarding] Forward a call to the phone number you registered beforehand. "Call forwarding" comes before "Voice mail" and "Call waiting". [Call rejection] Reject a call. Dual Network Dual Network This service allows you to use the mova service with your FOMA handset phone number. You can switch between FOMA and mova depending on the service area. • You cannot use the FOMA service and mova service concurrently. • Switch the services using the Dual Network service when the handset is not accessing network services. • Switching the network during communication forcibly terminates it. M[Menu] X (Service) X "Others" X "Dual network" X Perform the following operations [Dual network switching] Switch mova to FOMA to make FOMA handset available. English Guidance English Guidance The voice guidance played when a network service such as Voice mail service is activated or when the handset is out of service area can be played in English. 䂓 Incoming calls (Guidance to the caller) Language Description Japanese Voice guidance is played in Japanese. Japanese+ English English guidance will follow the Japanese guidance. English+ Japanese Japanese guidance will follow the English guidance. 䂓 Outgoing calls (Guidance to yourself) Language Description Japanese Voice guidance is played in Japanese. English Voice guidance is played in English. • When the caller is using this service at the same time, the caller's settings for making calls have precedence over the receiver's settings for receiving calls. M[Menu] X (Service) X "Others" X "English guidance" X Perform the following operations [Guidance Setting] Configure the guidance setting. Outgoing+Inc 䋺 Set guidance languages either for oming call incoming and outgoing call. Select the language after you select "Yes". Outgoing call 䋺 Set a guidance language for outgoing call. Select the language after you select "Yes". Incoming call 䋺 Set a guidance language for incoming call. Select the language after you select "Yes". [Check guidance setting] Check the current setting of "Guidance Setting". [Check dual network setting] Check the status of the setting. Network Services Continue on the next page 261 Number Settings Service Numbers Service Numbers You can make a call to DoCoMo Information Center and contacts for inquiries concerning malfunctions. • Depending on your UIM, the items displayed may differ or some items may not be displayed. Registering Additional Number(s) You can register or set name, number/ring tone for additional numbers. M[Menu] X (Service) X "Others" X "Multi number" X "Number settings" XPerform the following operations M[Menu] X (Service) X "Others" X "Service numbers" X Perform the following operations [Malfunction inquiries] Make a call to contacts for inquiries concerning malfunctions. [General Information] Make a call to DoCoMo Information Center. Remote Control Setting Remote Control You can set a landline phone or pay phone with push system, or DoCoMo handset to operate the "Voice mail" or "Call forwarding" service. • To use the "Voice mail" or "Call forwarding" services overseas, remote operation must be activated in advance. M[Menu] X (Service) X "Others" X "Remote control" X Perform the following operations [Activate Remote control] Activate Remote control. "Number settings" screen [Basic Number : Name] Enter a name for the Basic number. [Phone number] Display your phone number (Basic number). [Additional no1 : Name] Enter a name of additional number 1. [Phone number] Enter a phone number of additional number 1. [Additional no2 : Name] Enter a name of additional number 2. [Phone number] Enter a phone number of additional number 2. [Deactivate Remote control] Deactivate Remote control. [Check remote control setting] Check the status of the remote control setting. Multi Number Setting the Primary Number You can set a registered additional number as the primary number used for making ordinary calls. Multi Number This service allows you to use up to 2 extra phone numbers, additional number 1 and additional number 2, as your FOMA handset phone number in addition to the basic subscription number. • On the Dialing/Incoming screen, icons corresponding to Multi number (Basic number/ Additional number1/Additional number2) appear. • When dialing from Dialed calls or Received calls, the Multi number dialed from/received to is displayed, and this number is used to dial. 262 Network Services I[Done] M[Menu] X (Service)X "Others" X "Multi number" X"Set multi number" X "Basic number"/"Additional number1"/ "Additional number2" X "Yes" Confirming the Primary Number Settings M[Menu]X (Service) X "Others" X "Multi number" X [Check settings] Additional Services (USSD Registration) Setting Dial Number for Each Call Enter a phone number M[Menu] X "Multi number" X Enter a name of the additional number Registering and Using Service When DoCoMo adds a new network service, you can add the service into the menu. Up to 10 new network services can be registered. Adding Service Note • When a dial number is selected, the phone number is followed by ":590# (Basic number)"/ ":591# (Additional number 1)"/":592# (Additional number 2)". Register a service name and "Special number"/ "Service number (USSD)" informed from DoCoMo. • Special number is a number used to connect to Service Center. • Service number (USSD) is a code used to notify to Service Center. Setting Ring Tone and Image M[Menu] X (Service) X "Others" X "Multi number" X "Ring tone & image setting" X Select an additional number X Perform the following operations M[Menu] X (Service) X "Others" X "Additional Service" X Move the cursor to "Not recorded" X I[Edit] XPerform the following operations • C[List] : List of the items is displayed. Additional number setting [Individual setting] Select whether to set the ring tone or image. [Ring tone] Set the ring tone. Music 䋺 Selects the music saved in "Music" in the "Data box "folder.→P224 i-motion䋺 Select a movie/i-mode saved in "i-motion" in "Data box".→P201 Melody 䋺 Set the ring tone. D X Select a melody saved in "Melody" under the "Data box". →P204 䋺 Do not set the ring tone. Off [Call display] Set an image to be shown on the incoming call screen. Image 䋺 Select an image saved in "My picture" under "Data box".→P194 i-motion 䋺 Select a movie/i-mode saved in "i-motion" in "Data box".→P201 I[Done] Additional services edit screen [USSD code] Register Service number (USSD). [Service name] Enter a service name. C[OK] Sub Menu on Additional Service List Screen M[Menu] X (Service) X"Others" X "Additional service" X M[Menu]X Perform the following operations [Edit] Modify a selected service. [Select]䋪1 Perform the selected service. [Delete]䋪1 Delete a selected service. [Delete all]䋪2 Delete all services added. 䋪1䋺 Appears only when the recorded item is selected. 䋪2䋺 This option appears only when more than one item is recorded. Network Services 263 Performing Added Services M[Menu] X (Service) X"Others" X "Additional service" X Select a service Connect to Service Center. Additional Guidance Registering Additional Guidance You can register up to 10 guidance for code (USSD) returned from Service Center when an added service makes a connection to Service Center with service code (USSD). M[Menu] X (Service)X "Others" X "Additional guidance" X Move the cursor to "Not recorded" X I[Edit] X Perform the following operations Additional guidance edit screen [USSD code] Register Special number/Service number (USSD). [Reply message] Register an Additional guidance name. C[OK] Sub Menu on the Additional Guidance List Screen M[Menu] X (Service) X"Others" X "Additional guidance" X M[Menu] X Perform the following operations [Edit] Modify the selected guidance. [Delete]䋪1 Delete a selected/displayed guidance. [Delete all]䋪2 Delete all guidance. 䋪1䋺 Appears only when the recorded item is selected. 䋪2䋺 This option appears only when more than one item is recorded. 264 Network Services Data Communication Data Communications Enabled from FOMA Handset ................................................... Precautions for Use .......................................................................................................... Before Using...................................................................................................................... Flow Chart for Completing the Data Communication Setup......................................... AT Commands................................................................................................................... CD-ROM ............................................................................................................................. DoCoMo Keitai Datalink.................................................................................................... 266 266 267 267 268 268 268 For details of data communication, refer to "Manual for Data Communication" (PDF format) in included CD-ROM. To view "Manual for Data Communication" (PDF format), you must have Adobe Reader (Version 6.0 or up recommended). When Adobe Reader is not installed in your PC, you can download the latest version from Adobe Systems' web site (communication charges apply). For details, visit Adobe Systems' web site. 265 Data Communications Enabled from FOMA Handset When the FOMA handset is connected to a PC, data communication is available with packet communication and OBEX (data transfer). • This FOMA handset is not compatible with 64K data communication. • This FOMA handset is compatible with Remote Wakeup function. • This FOMA terminal is not compatible with the FAX communication. • This FOMA terminal is not compatible with the DoCoMo PDA "musea", "sigmarion㸈" or "sigmarion㸉" Packet communication Communication mode charged by the size of data sent and received. Packet communication is suitable for the way of using that handset send and receive the data when needed with connected to network. Communication speed depends on communication environment and network congestion. Using an access point of DoCoMo internet connection service such as "mopera U" or "mopera" which is compatible with FOMA packet communication, allows you to use data communication at the maximum rate of 3.6Mbps for receiving and at 384 Kbps for sending, This FOMAL705i handset also allows you to use data communication abroad by using W-CDMA or access point compatible with GPRS packet communication. • Communication charges may become high when you send or receive great amounts of data. • The maximum communication speed outside of a FOMA high speed area is 384 Kbps for receiving and 64 Kbps for sending. Data Transfer Data transfer is communication mode for sending or receiving data using DoCoMo keitai datalink. Communication charge is not applied. When you use DoCoMo keitai datalink software, you need the FOMA USB cable (optional) or FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01 (optional). 266 Data Communication Precautions for Use Usage Fee of Internet Service Provider When using internet, you will be charged for usage fee from internet service provider (hereinafter, referred to as provider) connected. This usage fee is to be paid directly to the provider, independently of FOMA service usage fee. For details of the usage fee, contact the provider. DoCoMo internet connection service "moperaU" or "mopera" is available. "mopera U" is a charged service requiring subscription. "mopera" is a service free of charge requiring no subscription. Setting Access Point (Provider, etc.) Packet communication requires to use an access point compatible with packet communication • DoPa access points are not available. • PHS64K/32K data communication access points for PIAFS, etc. are not available. User Authentication for Network Access Some access points may require user authentication (ID and password) for connection. In that case, enter ID and password for connection using communication software (dialup network). ID and password are provided from the provider or network administrator of the access point. For details, contact the provider or network administrator of the access point. Conditions for Packet Communication Communication using FOMA handset connected with PC or something requires the conditions given below. Even with these conditions arranged, communication may be disabled due to congestion in the base station or under some radio wave reception levels conditions. • FOMA USB Cable (optional) must be available on the PC. • FOMA handset must be in FOMA service area. • The access point must be compatible with FOMA packet communication. Note Before Using Operating Environment • Purchase the specified FOMA USB Cable or FOMA Rechargeable USB Cable 01. The USB cable for PC cannot be used because the shape of the connector is different. • This manual gives an example when you use FOMA USB Cable. PC's operating environmental conditions required for data communication are given below. Item Requirements PC • PC-AT compatible machine enabled to use CD-ROM drive • USB port (Universal Serial Bus Specification Rev1.1/2.0) • Display with resolution 800 x 600 dots, High Color (65,536 colors) or higher recommended OS䋪1 • Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows 2000 (Japanese version) Memory • Windows Vista; 512MB or more • Windows XP: 128MB or more䋪2 • Windows 2000: 64MB or more䋪2 Hard disk • Empty space of 5MB or more䋪2 䋪1䋺 DoCoMo does not guarantee proper operation if you upgrade your OS. 䋪2䋺 Equipments for memory/hard disk may vary depending on PC system configuration. When you insert included CD-ROM to a PC, the following warning screen may appear. This warning is displayed according to the security setting of the Internet Explorer. There is no matter with using the software. Click [Yes]. • This screen is an example when using Windows XP The warning screen may differ depending on the environments of your PC. Flow Chart for Completing the Data Communication Setup This section describes preparation to use packet communication with FOMA handset connected with PC. For details, refer to "Manual for Data Communication" (PDF format). Check that you have set USB mode setting to "Communication mode". Connect FOMA handset to PC using FOMA USB Cable Install the L705i communication setting file (Driver) Check for completion of installation Install the FOMA PC setting software and configure the settings Configure the settings with without using FOMA PC setting software. Connect Required Devices To use data communications, the following are required in addition to the FOMA handset and a PC: • FOMA USB Cable (optional) or FOMA Rechargeable USB Cable 01 (optional) • FOMA L705i CD ROM (accessory) Note • You can also download "L705iCommunication Setup File (Drivers)" or "FOMA PC Setup Software" that is contained on the "CD-ROM for FOMA L705i" from DoCoMo's web site. http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/support/download/ Data Communication Continue on the next page 267 Data Communication Software included in "FOMA L705i CD-ROM (CD-ROM for FOMA L705i)" L705iCommunication setting file (Drivers) This file is to be installed on a PC so that communication or file exchange can be performed after the FOMA handset and the PC are connected using the FOMA USB Cable (optional). FOMA PC Setup Software This software is to be installed on a PC to quickly configure settings of dial-up connection, etc. that is required to perform data communication. DoCoMo Keitai Datalink "DoCoMo keitai datalink" is software that allows you to back up your "Phonebook" entries, "Mail", etc. and edit the data on your PC. DoCoMo keitai datalink is provided via website of DoCoMo. For more details and the download, visit the following DoCoMo website. http://datalink.nttdocomo.co.jp/ Note AT Commands AT command is used to make and confirm function settings for FOMA handset from a PC. For details, refer to "Manual for Data Communication" (PDF format) included in CDROM. CD-ROM The bundled CD-ROM contains applications to perform data communication with the FOMA terminal, "Manual for Data Communication" and "Kuten Code List" (PDF). For details, see the bundled CD-ROM. • L705i communication setting file • FOMA PC Setup Software • Introduction to DoCoMo keitai datalink • "Manual for Data Communication" (PDF) • "Kuten Code List" (PDF) • Adobe® Reader® 8.1 268 Data Communication • For details such as transferable data, operating environment such as supported OS, how to install/operate the software and restrictions, see the website above. For how to operate the software after it is installed, see the help. To use "DoCoMo keitai datalink", you need to purchase the "FOMA USB Cable (optional)". Overseas Use Overview of International Roaming (WORLD WING) ..................................................... Services Available Overseas ........................................................................................... Checking before Using Overseas.................................................................................... Making Calls Overseas ..................................................................................................... Receiving Calls Overseas ................................................................................................ Setting Network Search Mode .......................... Network Search Mode/Network Mode Configuring Preferred Networks...................................................."Preferred NW lists" Displaying Network Name while Roaming............................... Operator name display Activating Roaming Guidance ............................................ Roaming guidance setting Setting to Accept No Incoming Calls during Roaming.............................. Call barring Using Network Services during Roaming....................................................................... 270 270 271 273 275 276 276 277 277 277 278 269 Service i-mode Overview of International Roaming (WORLD WING) International roaming (WORLD WING) is a service that allows to talk or make communications over an affiliated overseas carrier's network using the same phone number as that used domestically. For details of the services available during international roaming, refer to "DoCoMo WORLD SERVICE User's Guide". Also, in DoCoMo's "International service web site", you can see the latest information on international services and download the latest issue of "DoCoMo WORLD SERVICE User's Guide". URL of DoCoMo's "international service web site" http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/service/world/ Subscribing to WORLD WING If you subscribed to the FOMA service after September 1, 2005, a separate subscription is not required. • If you subscribed to the FOMA service after September 1, 2005, a separate subscription is not required. However, if you unsubscribed to the FOMA service subscription or canceled the service, a separate subscription is required. • If you initially subscribed to the FOMA service before August 31, 2005 and have not subscribed to "WORLD WING", a separate subscription is required. Description You can use i-mode to acquire information of Japan and the country you stay. i-mode mail Using the same mail address as that used in Japan, you can send/receive i-mode mail. i-Channel䋪1 You can download information periodically as in Japan.䋪2 You can also press the i-Channel assigned key to open a channel list and download detailed information.䋪3 SMS You can send or receive SMS to/ from a FOMA user in Japan and a user of an oversea telecommunication carrier other than DoCoMo. Data You can connect PC or other devices Communication to use data communication (packet data communication). 䋪1䋺 May not be available depending on the carrier or area. 䋪2䋺 Auto Update is suspended automatically if the handset is connected to an overseas carrier. To resume the automatic update of i-Channel overseas, you need to perform i-Channel settings again. However, a packet communication charges apply in addition to the monthly charge. 䋪3䋺 A packet communication charges apply for Auto Update of information on the "Basic Channel". Difference in Communication Services among Networks You need to configure the network search mode as well as preferred network to be searched in order to use the handset overseas.→P276 Services Available Overseas Communication services available vary depending on overseas carriers and/or network used. For details of communication services available in international roaming, refer to "DoCoMo WORLD SERVICE User's Guide" or DoCoMo's web site. →P270 Communication Services Available Service Voice call Video Phone 270 Overseas Use Description Using the same phone number as that used in Japan, you can make/ receive calls in a country you stay and make international calls to countries other than that you stay in. You can make or receive an international video call with a user of an overseas specific 3G carrier or a FOMA handset user in Japan. Service 3G GSM GPRS Voice call 䂾 䂾 䂾 Video Phone 䂾 㬍䋪 㬍䋪 i-mode 䂾 㬍 䂾 i-mode mail 䂾 㬍 䂾 SMS 䂾 䂾 䂾 i-Channel 䂾 㬍 䂾 Data Communication 䂾 㬍 䂾 䂾 : Available 㬍 : Not available 䋪 : When a call is made, a redial confirmation screen opens. Select "Redial voice call" to redial Voice Call. 䂓 Network for overseas Network 䂓 Setting network services Description W-CDMA (3G) W-CDMA is a third generation mobile communication network complying with 3GPP䋪1 global standards. GSM䋪2 GSM is the second generation mobile communication network in digital communication system that is most widely used around the world. GPRS䋪3 GPRS is the 2.5 generation mobile communication system that enables high-speed packet communication using GSM. 䋪1䋺 Abbreviation of 3rd Generation Partnership Project. This is a regional standards organization for developing common technical specifications for the third generation mobile communications system (IMT-2000). 䋪2䋺 Abbreviation of Global System for Mobile Communications. GSM is one of the standards for mobile phones unified in Europe. 䋪3䋺 Abbreviation of General Packet Radio Service. This is a packet communication service that is widely spread in Europe. Checking before Using Overseas STEP1 : Preparation before departure STEP2 : Using overseas STEP3 : Setting after returning to Japan You can activate or deactivate the subscribed network services from overseas. The following network services can be accessed: • Caller ID notification service䋪1 䋪2 • Voice mail service䋪1 䋪3 • Call forwarding service䋪1 䋪3 • Caller ID Request service䋪1 • Call Waiting Service䋪1 • English guidance䋪1 • Nuisance call blocking service䋪1 • Roaming guidance䋪1 • Call barring 䋪1䋺 May not be activated in some service areas. 䋪2䋺 Caller ID may not be sent correctly or not be sent at all. 䋪3䋺 To operate from overseas, you need to activate the "Remote control" (P262) while in Japan in advance. 䂓 Convenient functions and services available overseas Functions and services Description Roaming The other party is notified with a Guidance (Intl) voice guidance that you are in international roaming. Call barring Reject reception during international roaming. Dual Clock Display You can view the date and time in two cities at once. Unit converter You can set exchange rate for currency conversion. 䂓 Recommended booklets Other than This Manual Title Preparation before Departure 䂓 Subscription If you have not yet subscribed to WORLD WING (P270), make a subscription. • Install UIM subscribed to WORLD WING to FOMA handset. 䂓 Communication services, etc. in countries and regions For information such as countries, areas, telecommunication carriers available, visit DoCoMo's "International Service Web site".→P270 䂓 Charging • Cautions When Handling the AC Adapter →P21 • Charging Using the AC Adapter →P42, P44 䂓 Using i-mode You have to make "International Settings" in advance. Select "i Menu" → select "English iMenu" → "Options" → "International Settings" to display setup screen. Description Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] Describes how to use i-mode and i-mode mail overseas and their fees, etc. DoCoMo WORLD SERVICE User's Guide Describes details of international roaming service including contents of the service, usage fee, precautions. Mobile Phone User's Guide (Network Services) Describes contents, settings, precautions, etc., of the network services. 䂓 Billing of charges Overseas charges are billed with your monthly charge. Note that they may appear on a billing invoice of the next month or later due to the situation of the operator of your country of stay. Also note that the billing invoice for charges in the same charging period may be sent to you in a different month. Note • This manual contains quick manual "Overseas Use" that can be used conveniently for referencing operations. Please reference it when using FOMA handset overseas. Overseas Use 271 Network Technical Operation Center Overseas Use 䂓 Network switching By default, "Network search mode" is set to "Auto". It is recommended to set "Network mode" to "WCDMA only" to save the battery when using in Japan or in the areas where 3G area networks are available.→P276 • To switch networks manually →P276 䂓 Display on screen An icon indicating the connected network is displayed so that you can view the available (Image to be communication services added) (P270). The connected carrier name also appears on the Display. a Icons indicating the connected network Connected to a FOMA network in Japan Connected to a 3G network overseas Connected to a GSM network overseas Connected to a GPRS network overseas b Connected carrier name 䋪 The network name does not appear when the handset is connected to the FOMA network in Japan. When Your Mobile Phone Is Lost or Stolen, etc. While Overseas 䇴 DoCoMo Information Center> (24-hour service) 䂓 From a DoCoMo handset International Access Codes of Major Countries (Table1) 䋭81䋭3䋭5366䋭3114䋪(Free) 䋪From a fixed line phone, International phone call charges to Japan apply. 㶎When using the FOMA L705i handset, call +813-5366-3114. (press and hold 0 for 1+ seconds to enter "+" sign.) 䂓 From a fixed-line phone (Universal Number) International Phone Codes for Universal Numbers (Table2) 䋭800䋭0120䋭0151䋪 䋪Domestic call charges for your overseas location will apply to calls. For loss or theft of the handset, settlement of accumulated charges, or handset failure while overseas, refer to "For loss or theft of the handset or charges while overseas" or "For a handset failure while overseas" on the back of this manual. Call and communication charges apply after the handset was lost or stolen are still charged to you. (24-hour service) 䂓 From a DoCoMo handset International access number of your country of stay (table1) 䋭81䋭3-6718-1414䋪(Free) 䋪From a fixed line phone, International phone call charges to Japan apply. 㶎 When using the FOMA L705i handset, call +813-6718-1414. (press and hold 0 for 1+ seconds to enter "+" sign.) 䂓 From a fixed-line phone (Universal Number) International Phone Codes for Universal Numbers (Table2) 䋭800䋭5931䋭8600䋪 䋪Domestic call charges for your overseas location will apply to calls. International Access Codes of Major Countries (Table1) International access numbers for major countries are as follows (as of 䃂 2007): Area Ireland Code 00 Area Turkey Code 00 U.S.A. 011 New Zealand 00 U.A.E. 00 Norway 00 U.K. 00 Hungary 00 Italy 00 Philippines 00 India 00 Finland 00䋯 Indonesia 001 Australia 0011 France 00 Brazil 0041䋯 990 Netherlands 00 Canada 011 Korea 001 Greece 00 Vietnam 00 Singapore 001 Belgium 00 Switzerland 00 Poland 00 Sweden 00 Portugal 00 0021䋯 0023 Spain 00 Hong Kong 001 Thailand 001 Macao 00 Taiwan 002 Malaysia 00 Czech 00 Monaco 00 China 00 Luxembourgr 00 Denmark 00 Russia 810 Germany 00 䋪 Codes may be changed. 䋪 For the codes of the other countries and details, see the DoCoMo's "International service web site".→P270 272 Overseas Use International Phone Codes for Universal Numbers (Table2) International prefix numbers for the universal number are as follows (as of 䃂 2007): Area Code Area Code Ireland 00 Thailand 001 U.S.A. 011 Taiwan 00 Argentina 00 China 00 U.K. 00 Denmark 00 Israel 014 Germany 00 Italy 00 New Zealand 00 Australia 0011 Norway 00 Australia 00 Philippines 00 Netherlands 00 Finland 990 Canada 011 France 00 Korea 001 Brazil 0021 00 Colombia 009 Belgium Singapore 001 Hong Kong 001 Switzerland 00 Malaysia 00 Sweden 00 Luxembourgr 00 Spain 00 䋪 Codes may be changed. 䋪 For the codes of the other countries and details, see the DoCoMo's "International service web site".→P270 Setting after Returning to Japan When you have returned to Japan, FOMA handset is automatically connected to FOMA network and appears at the top of the screen. • If the FOMA network is not connected, check whether "Network mode" and "Network search mode" are both set to "Auto". Making an International Call (Including to Japan) Make a call prefixing "+" and a country code to another party's phone number. • Press 0 for more than one second to enter "+". • To call a WORLD-WING user who is overseas, dial "81", the country code for Japan. 0 (for 1+ seconds) X Enter "Country Code - Area Code (City Code) - Phone Number" • When making a call to a fixed phone in Japan from abroad, enter "81" as the country code. • Generally, in the situation where a "0" appears before the Area Code (City Code), please remove "0". (In a few countries, like Italy, "0" must not be removed). • When making a call to a mobile phone or PHS in Japan, omit leading "0" as well. • Country code →P274 䂓 When making video call M[Menu] and then select X "Video phone call" Making a Call Easily to Japan If a call is made using an entry in Dialed or Received calls or the Phonebook in which a phone number with a leading "0" is recorded/ registered, leading "0" is automatically replaced with "+ Country code (i.e. +81)". • By default, your handset is configured to enter "+81" (country code for Japan) automatically.→P61 Display an entry in history/Phonebook Select a history or Phonebook X A Making Calls Overseas When both of you and the other party are using a telecommunication carrier applicable to FOMA Video calls, international Video calls are also available. • For information on the countries, areas, telecommunication carriers that support FOMA Video calls , visit DoCoMo's "International service web site.→P270 • Depending on the handset connected via an international Video call, the video streaming may be ceased on the other party's handset, or the call may be disconnected. 䂓 Using Redial logs Open the Redial logs (P54) or the Dialed calls detail screen (P54). 䂓 Using Received call log Open the Received call log (P56) or the Received call detail screen (P56). 䂓 Using Phonebook Open the Phonebook list screen (P84) or the Phonebook detail screen (P85). 䂓 When two or more phone number exist in the Phonebook list screen Press H to select the number to make a phone call to. 䂓 When two or more phone number exist in the Phonebook detail screen Press H to display the phone number to call, then press I[Send]. Overseas Use Continue on the next page 273 c Area • Dialing confirmation screen shows a phone number prefixed with "+ Country code". 䂓 When making video call M[Menu] and then select X "Video phone call" Indonesia Area New Caledonia Code 687 Egypt 20 New Zealand 64 Australia 61 Norway 47 Australia 43 Hungary 36 Netherlands 31 Fiji 679 Canada Philippines 63 Korea 82 Finland 358 "Original number"䋺 : Does not replace the leading "0" with "+Country code". Greece 30 France 33 "Cancel"䋺 : cancel to call Singapore 65 Brazil 55 Dialed call confirmation screen "Dialing" Switzerland 41 Vietnam 84 • This conversion is available only out of the service area (during international roaming). • The conversion is enabled when you directly enter a phone number with the leading "0" using dial keys. Sweden 46 Peru 51 Spain 34 Belgium 32 Thailand 66 Hong Kong 852 Taiwan 886 Macao 853 Making an International Call (Including to Japan) Selecting Registered Country Code Tahiti 689 Malaysia 60 Czech 420 Note From sub menu, you can select and add Country code to an entered phone number. Enter "Area code - other party's phone number" Maldives 960 Russia 㶎 The codes may be changed. 㶎 For the codes of the other countries and details, see the DoCoMo's "International service web site".→P270 M[Menu] X "International Dial" The "Select Country" screen opens. Select a Country code The "+ Country code" is added at the beginning of the phone number. • When an entered phone number begins with "0", it is replaced with "+ Country code". 䂓 When making video call M[Menu] and then select X "Video phone call" Note • By default, 22 country codes are stored in the "Select Country" screen. Country codes can be added.→P62 • Available operations on the Country code selection screen are the same as on the Country code list screen. Country Codes of Major Countries Area 274 Code 62 Code Area Code U.S.A. China U.K. 44 Germany 49 Italy 39 Turkey 90 India 91 Japan 81 Overseas Use 86 Making Call inside the Country Where You Stay Make a call by dialing a receiver's phone number from Area Code (Toll Number). • If both of you and the other party are using WORLD WING overseas, make a call in the same way as described in "Making a call to a country outside your country of stay (including Japan)" (P273) even in the same country/region. • When "Auto international dial" is set to "On", the Dialing confirmation screen (P274) opens if a call is made to a phone number whose area code (city code) starts with "0" from Phonebook or Dialed/ Redialed calls list. In this case, press select "Original No" to make the call. When both of you and the other party are using a telecommunication carrier applicable to FOMA Video calls, international Video calls are available by pressing M[Menu] X Select "Video phone call" after the international call dialing procedure. 䍃 For information about the countries where connection can be made and telecommunications carriers, visit the DoCoMo's web site. 䍃 The video streaming may be ceased on the other party's handset, or the call may be disconnected depending on the international video-phone terminal. Receiving Calls Overseas A call arrives The ringtone sounds. • I[Silent] : Stop the ring tone • P : Place the call on response hold.→P67 To terminate the call P Answer the call. 䂓 To answer a Video call using the Camera image Press A. 䂓 To answer a video call using the alternate image Press C[Image]. Note • In some countries or regions, you may be charged also for incoming calls. In that case, you are charged for both the international forwarding and reception fees. • No or different caller ID may be notified for some telecommunication carriers used. • When there is an incoming call during international roaming, international forwarding from Japan occurs. The caller is charged for the call fee to Japan and the receiver is charged for international forwarding fee. • When the Public Mode (Drive Mode) is activated, incoming call actions such as sounding the ringtone or blinking the Illumination Indicator will not take place. Also, even if a call arrives when the display is turned off, the backlight of the display will not be turned on. Making call to your FOMA handset from Japan You can be called at your phone number in the same way as when you are in Japan. Making call to your FOMA handset from overseas You are called via Japan regardless of the place you stay. Similarly to making an international call to Japan, you can be called in the way described below. Making a call by entering "International Access Code䋪1-81䋪2㵥 your phone number with leading "0" omitted䋪3" 䋪1䋺 When dialing to a mobile phone, you may be able to dial by entering "+" instead of the International Access Code. 䋪2䋺 Enter Country Code of Japan. 䋪3䋺 Enter "90-XXXX-XXXX" when the number begins with "090" or "80-XXXX-XXXX" when it begins with "080". When a Call is Interrupted A Call Cannot Be Made or Received/Stays Out of the Service Area/Power Cannot be Turned On If a call cannot be made or received, the radio wave reception level stays out of the service area, or power cannot be turned on, the following situation is supposed; • Weak radio wave reception level or out of the service area • Malfunction of the local switchboard or the base station, or temporary circuit congestion • Wrong operation of the FOMA handset • Other Visit the DoCoMo's "International service web site" for the latest area and interruption information, etc. →P270 Upon confirming the operation method, try the following; • If you are indoors, check to see if the condition is the same as outdoor, too. • Check to see if your monthly charge does not exceed the credit limit. • Turn on the power again. • Manually select the operator to connect.→P276 Contact the Network Technical Operation Center on the back of this manual if the condition does not recover after checking the above. Credit Limit (Service Suspension Standard) • The credit limit is provided for WORLD WING. If we have confirmed that your monthly charge has exceeded the credit limit, this service will be suspended until the end of the corresponding month. • The accumulated charge is the amount before applying free communications fee. • The Credit limit includes call/communication charges and received call charges for overseas roaming, digital communications charges such as video calls and received call charge, packet communication charges and SMS communication charges. Note that since the international forwarding charge and any charge whose data have not been received by us from the operator of your country of stay are not included, the billing amount may exceed the credit limit. In that case, you must pay your monthly charge for this service used before suspended. • When payment of your monthly charge is confirmed, suspension of the WORLD WING service will be lifted (After the payment, it may take a while before the suspension of the service is lifted). You can make a payment by credit card settlement (Once payment only) from overseas. • Contact DoCoMo Information Center on the back of this manual for details. Overseas Use 275 Note Network Search Mode/Network Mode Setting Network Search Mode Default • After coming back to Japan, if the icon indicating the network status remains out of the service area, set "Network mode" to "Auto" or "3G" and "Network search mode" to "Auto". • Searching networks may take a long time. • When setting to "Auto", networks will be searched automatically whenever you turn on the handset or move out of the service area. Network search mode: Auto Network mode: Auto Select search mode activated when the network access point has been changed while using overseas. • By default, "Network search mode" is set to "Auto". When you use the FOMA handset in Japan or in the areas where 3G area network is available, it is recommended to switch "Network mode" to "WCDMA only" to reduce the consumption of the battery pack. M[Menu] X (Setting) X "International roaming" X "Network" X Perform the following operations "Preferred NW lists" Configuring Preferred Networks You can register up to 20 networks to be searched or configured by priority when searching networks. M[Menu]X (Settings)X"International Roaming"X"Network"X"Host Selection" [Network search mode] Auto 䋺 Automatically search and configure the network. Manual 䋺 The network search screen appears. Select and configure one of the networks in the list. X "Yes" X Select a network • Available networks are followed by the circular marks. Re-searching network 䋺 Search network manually or automatically in the same way as described above. [Network mode] Specify the network service to search. • Check available communication systems in the country of use before specifying a network.→P271 䋺 Search for all available networks Auto regardless of their communication systems. 䋺 Search only for 3G networks. 3G GSM/GPRS䋺 Search only for GSM/GPRS networks. [Preferred lists] You can register networks to be searched and set by priority.→P276 [Operator name display] Specify whether to show the network name that is currently online in the Stand-by display.→P277 [Host selection] Specify a host other than i-mode Center.→P149 [ᷣSMSC] Set the SMS center address.→P182 276 Overseas Use The preferred network list screen opens. • If the networks have been registered, the network names appear in order of priority. • C[Change] : Re-apply the "Preferred lists" setting to another network. I[Menu] X Perform the following operations [UPLMN manual select] Add a network to the Preferred list by entering MCC (country code) and MNC (network code). XEnter MCC and MNC X I[Done] X "Yes" [UPLMN select by list] Select a presciently registered network from the network list, then set it as the preferred network. X Select a network X "Yes" • I[Country] : Selecting a country name allows you to select an available network in the country from the list. [Set VPLMN to UPLMN] Set the network in use as the preferred network. X"Yes" Note • Depending on the signal reception, a network that is not registered may get connected. • The settings of this function will be saved on the UIM. Sub menu of the "Preferred lists" screen "Preferred lists" screen (P276) XM [Menu] X Performs the following operations [Add new] Insert a newly detected network above the selected network in the list. Go to Step 2 described in "Configuring Preferred Networks" (P276). [Activate roaming guidance] Activate the roaming guidance. [Deactivate roaming guidance] Deactivate the roaming guidance. [Check roaming guidance setting] Check the status of the setting. [Change] Re-apply the "Preferred lists" setting to another network. Go to Step 2 described in "Configuring Preferred Networks" (P276). Note • When deactivating the guidance, a call tone set by the overseas carrier sounds. • Some overseas carriers may not offer this option. • Even if you activated this option, a voice guidance in a foreign language may be played due to the overseas carrier's services. [Delete] Delete the selected network. X"Yes" [Move up]䋪 Move the selected network directly up in the list. Call barring [Move down]䋪 Move the selected network directly down in the list. Setting to Accept No Incoming Calls during Roaming 䋪䋺 Does not appear depending on the current position in the list. Operator name display Displaying Network Name while Roaming Default Displayed Specify whether to show the network name that is currently online in the Stand-by display. M[Menu] X (Settings) X "International roaming" X "Network" X "Operator name display" X "ON"/ "OFF" X "Yes" Roaming guidance setting Activating Roaming Guidance Before you leave Japan, you can set so that the other party who makes a call to you during international roaming will be notified of it with a voice guidance. • The service may not be operable when "Out of service area" is displayed. • You can set to play the guidance from abroad. →P278 "Yes" You can set so that incoming calls, mails, etc., are all restricted during roaming. You can also set to restrict only incoming Video calls. M[Menu] X (Settings) X "Lock/ Security" X "Keypad unlock" X Perform the following operation [Activate barring of incoming call -roam] X Select from the following options X Enter the Network security code X "Yes" 䋺 Restrict all incoming calls. Barring all incoming calls Data calls barring 䋺 Restrict only incoming Video calls. (Only inside the 3G network service area). [Deactivate barring of incoming call - roam] X Enter the Network security code X "Yes" [Check barring of incoming call settings - roam setting] Check the status of the setting. Note • These services may not be operable in some countries. M[Menu] X (Service) X "Others" X "Roaming guidance" X Perform the following operations Overseas Use 277 Call Forwarding (Int.) Using Network Services during Roaming You can use network services of Voice mail service, Call Forwarding service, and Roaming guidance settings overseas. • In order to use Voice mail and/or Call Forwarding service, you have to subscribe to the network service(s) and activate"Re,pte access(int.)" in advance in Japan.→P262 • Using these services overseas costs the fee for making international call to Japan. • The services may not be operable in some countries. Voice Mail (Int.) Operating the Voice Mail Service Overseas You can activate/deactivate the Voice mail service overseas. You can also replay recorded messages or change the settings following a voice guidance. • The service may not be operable when "Out of service area" is displayed. Operating the Call Forwarding Service Overseas You can activate/deactivate the Call forwarding service overseas. • The service may not be operable when "Out of service area" is displayed. [Activate call forwarding] Activate the Call forwarding service. [Deactivate call forwarding] Deactivate the Call forwarding service. [Call forwarding settings] Check the status of the setting. M[Menu] X (Setting) X "International roaming" X "Voice mail (Int.)" X Perform the following operations [Set ring time] Set time before connecting to Voice mail service center after receiving a call. "Yes" Operate according to voice guidance Note • To use this service outside the service area at your overseas location, you need to switch off the handset where signals can be received. 278 Overseas Use Operate according to voice guidance • To use this service outside the service area at your overseas location, you need to switch off the handset where signals can be received. Roaming Guide (Int.) Operating Roaming Guidance Overseas [Deactivate voice mail] Deactivate the Voice mail service. [Voice mail setting] Change the settings following a voice guidance. "Yes" Note [Active voice mail] Activate the Voice mail service. [Play messages] Play a Voice mail message. M[Menu] X (Setting) X "International roaming" X "Call forwarding (Int.)" X Perform the following operations You can activate/deactivate Roaming guidance overseas. • The service may not be operable when "Out of service area" is displayed. M[Menu] X (Settings) X "International roaming" X "Roaming guidance (Int.)" "Yes" Operate according to voice guidance Remote Access Setting (Int.) Setting Remote Access Overseas You can activate/deactivate Remote access overseas. • The service may not be operable when "Out of service area" is displayed. M[Menu]X (Settings)X"International roaming"X"Remote access setting(Int.)" "Yes" Operate according to voice guidance Caller ID request (Int.) Operating Caller ID Request Service Overseas You can activate/deactivate the Caller ID request service overseas. • The service may not be operable when "Out of service area" is displayed. M[Menu] X (Settings) X "International roaming" X "Caller ID requestU (Int.)" "Yes" Operate according to voice guidance Overseas Use 279 Appendix/External Devices/ Troubleshooting Menu List ........................................................................................................................... Default Data ....................................................................................................................... Dial Keys Assignments to Characters ............................................................................ List of Symbols and Special Characters......................................................................... Pictograph (E-Moji) List.................................................................................................... Emoticon List .................................................................................................................... List of Common Phrases.................................................................................................. Combinations of Multiaccess Functions ........................................................................ Combinations of Multitask Functions ............................................................................. Services Available from FOMA Handset......................................................................... Options and Related Devices........................................................................................... 282 292 296 297 298 299 300 302 303 304 305 Interfacing to External Devices Video Play Software.......................................................................................................... 305 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting................................................................................................................ Error Messages ................................................................................................................. Warranty and After-sales Service.................................................................................... About the i-mode Malfunction Check Site ...................................................................... Updating Software .............................................................................. Software Update Protecting Mobile Phone from Dangerous Data ............................Scanning function Major Specifications ......................................................................................................... Number of Items that can be Stored, Registered and Protected on the FOMA Handset .............................................................................................................................. Authentication ................................................................................................................... Export Administration of This Product and Its Accessories ........................................ 306 308 323 324 325 327 330 331 332 335 281 Menu List Functions with indicated in "Default settings:" field are those initialized to default settings by performing "Reset settings".→P245 Function names Received mail Reference P170 Sent mail Unregistered P170 Unsent mail Unregistered P171 Mail Compose message 䋭 P161 Check new message 䋭 P168 Receive option SMS 䋭 P167 Compose message 䋭 P181 Check new SMS 䋭 P182 Pre-install data only P164 Receive option setting : OFF Receive attch file : All checkmarked Check new messages : All checkmarked P179 Edit header : Non Edit signature : Non Edit quotation> Auto attach : Checkmarked on "Signature" P180 Font size : Standard Scroll : 1 line Mail list : 2 lines name Folder security : Non checkmarked Melody auto play : ON Receiving display : Alarm mode P180 SMS report request : OFF SMS validity period : 3 days SMS input character : Japanese (70characters) P182 Check setting : 䋭 Reset setting : 䋭 P180 Template Mail setting Communication Edit View SMS Other 282 Default settings Mail of "䊄 䉮 䊝䈎䉌 䈱䈍⍮䉌 䈞 (Information from DoCoMo)" Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Function names i-mode Reference 䋭 P139 Bookmark Unregistered P143 Files contained in Screen Memos Unregistered P144 Last URL 䋭 P140 Go To location Input address 䋭 P142 URL history No history P142 Message MessageR No message P150 MessageF No message P150 i-Channel list Basic channels P155 Ticker setting Ticker display : ON Ticker speed : Normal P155 Reset i-Channel 䋭 P155 䋭 P150 Connection timeout : 60 seconds Check new messages : All checkmarked P147 Image : ON Sound effect : ON Use phone info : Yes Font size : Standard Scroll : 1 line Mail list : 2 lines Auto-display : Message R preferred Melody auto play : ON P148 i-motion Melody auto play : ON i-motion type : Standard P153 P153 Home Disable, No URL P148 Certificates All valid P152 Other Check settings : 䋭 Rest settings : 䋭 P148 Only pre-installed i-appli P185 Security error history No history P190 Auto start info No information P190 i-Channel Check new message i-mode setting Communication View Software list i-appli Default settings iMenu i-appli info i-appli settings Trace info No information P190 Display SW info Not display P185 Auto start set On P189 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Continue on the next page 283 Function names Phonebook Reference Unregistered Search phonebook Search all data P82 Number of contacts 䋭 P88 Default mode Search all data P89 Create domain list @docomo.ne.jp P89 Phonebook settings Call/Mail history View P89 Received Calls Unregistered P56 Redial Unregistered P54 Received mails Unregistered P178 Sent mails Call Cost My Pictures Data box Music Music channel i-motion Melody P77 Display image Unregistered P178 䋭 P239 Checking total costs 䋭 P240 Set call cost limit Off P240 Call duration Delete call cost icon 䋭 P240 i-mode None P194 Camera None P194 Deco-mail Pictures Only pre-installed file P194 Deco-mail pictogram Only pre-installed file P194 Preinstalled Only pre-installed file P194 Data transfer None P194 Item Only pre-installed file P194 Animation None P194 micro SD 䋭 P194 i-mode Non P217 Playlist None P224 micro SD 䋭 P224 Distributed Program None P219 i-mode None P201 Camera None P201 Preinstalled Only pre-installed file P201 Data transfer None P201 micro SD 䋭 P201 i-mode None P204 Preinstalled Only pre-installed file P204 Data transfer None P204 micro SD SD-Audio 284 Default settings Add to phonebook Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting 䋭 P204 䋭 P224 Function names Recent played䋪 MUSIC Music Player Music channel SD-Audio Player Music life Receive Ir data microSD card Stopwatch P221 Train : All songs, level 2 Sport timer : All songs 30 Min. Sport timer : All songs 30 Min. P228 Unregistered P224 All songs Unregistered P222 Artist Unregistered P222 Genre Unregistered P222 Album Unregistered P222 Program1 Unregistered P216 Program2 Unregistered P216 Set Programs 䋭 P216 Program list 䋭 P216 What's Music Channel? 䋭 P216 Music life Train : All songs, level 2 Sport timer : All songs 30 Min. Sport timer : All songs 30 Min. P228 Playlist 䋭 P224 All songs 䋭 P222 Artist 䋭 P222 Genre 䋭 P222 Album 䋭 P222 䋭 P134 Receive 䋭 P212 Receive all 䋭 P213 PIM 䋭 P208 Data update 䋭 P209 Memory info. 䋭 P209 Reset microSD card 䋭 P207 䋭 P238 Record msg. settings Setting Off P71 Record msg. list Unregistered P72 䋭 P241 Custom Menu Record Message Reference Playlist Bar Code Reader Lifekit Default settings 䋭 䋪䋺 "Playing" is displayed when playing a music. Selecting the song opens the Player screen for the song in playback. Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Continue on the next page 285 Function names Photo-mode Camera P129 Movie-mode 㵪 P130 㵪 P134 Save to : Handset Auto saving : ON Save picture to: My picture/ Camera Save movie to: I-motion/Camera P130 P133 Shutter 1 P133 Saving option Shutter sound Auto P133 Schedule Unregistered P232 Alarm Unregistered P231 Memos Unregistered P243 To do list Unregistered P235 World Clock Japan P240 㵪 P242 Yen/Dollar P241 Flicker tuning Calculator Unit converter Remembering dates Sounds&vibration Currency Surface Acre/Hectare P242 Length mm/cm P242 Weight mg/g P242 Temperature 㵪 P234 Volume milliiter1 Liter P242 Velocity km/h / meter/s P242 Date Counter Unregistered P237 Date Search 㵪 P238 Select ringtone Voice call : Ring01 Video call : Ring02 Mail : Message01 Message R : Message02 Message F : Message03 SMS : Message04 P92 Dial sound : Japanese Slide tone : Slide tone 1 Keypad sound: Keypad sound 1 Menu effect : Menu effect 1 Power On : Power On Power off : Power Off Low battery alert P96 Settings Select effect tone 286 Reference Bar Code Reader Camera settings Stationery Default settings 㵪 Volume (All) Level 3 P94 Vibrator (All) Off P95 Manner mode set Manner Mode P98 Mail ring duration Once P97 Set mute ring(sec.) Off P121 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Function names View Stand-by display Reference P99 Incoming voice call : Image, incoming_call_black Incoming video call : Image, incoming_call_black P100 Wake-up display Image, pwron P102 Dialing Motion dialing : Digital Dialing Quick Search : ON P101 Menu Display Settings Menu customization : Color theme setting Menu guidance : ON Settings Call display P104 P104 Display duration : 10 sec. Display brightness : 100 % AC connected : Display setting P103 Color theme Illumination dot P103 Illumination dot Settings Lighting : ON Incoming voice call : Red Incoming video call : Red & White New mail : Blue New message R : Blue & White New message F : Yellow & Pink New SMS : Yellow & Aqua Voice mail : Pink & White Record message : Green & Yellow Playing music : Pink & Aqua Alarm : Yellow & Pink & Aqua Schedule/To do list : Blue & Pink & Aqua During call : OFF Missed call : OFF Unread message : OFF P105 Backlight Call/VT/Dialing Default settings Wallpaper : Image, illusion Display items : Clock Clock type : Large digital Show shortcut icons : ON Incoming call Video Phone Answer mode : SEND key only Auto Answer: ̆Auto answering : Off Reject/Accept call : ̆Reject/Accept call : Accept ̆Reject unknown : Off Anonymous caller : (All) Disable On hold tone : Hold tone 1 Display phonebook image : On Video phone set: ̆Displaying setting : Other-Me ̆Send camera image : On ̆Screen size : Large ̆Visual preference : Normal ̆Light : Always on ̆Auto redial as voice : Off ̆Hand-free switch : On Substitute image : Default Response hold image : Default Holding image : Default P66 P244 P118 P119 P121 P119 P68 P102 P73 P73 P73 P73 P73 P73 P73 P73 P73 P73 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Continue on the next page 287 Function names Call/VT/Dialing International roaming 288 Reference Reconnect alarm : High alarm Quality alarm : High alarm Holding tone : Hold tone 1 Close setting : End the call Noise reduction : Off P64 P97 P68 P66 P64 Self mode Off P115 Prefix dial Prefix dial 1 : 009130010 Prefix 2/Prefix 3: Unregistered P63 Sub Address On P63 Earphone Switch call : Off P244 Lock Lock all : No Call/Mail Lock : (OFF) Data access lock : (Off) P113 P114 P115 Settings Lock/Security Default settings Call feature Secret mode Off P117 Display Call/mail logs (All) On P117 Keypad unlock Allow manual unlock P116 Change Security code Security code (4 digits):0000 P111 PIN code 㵪 P112 Scanning Function Setting Scan Function : 㵪Set scan : ON 㵪Set message scan : ON Version : 1.1 P327 P327 P329 Network search mode : Auto Network mode : Auto Preferred NW list : (The contents saved in FOMA card is displayed) Operator name display : ON Host selection : i-mode SMS center : DoCoMo P276 P276 P276 P277 P149 P182 Voice mail (Int.) 㵪 P278 Call forwarding (Int.) 㵪 P278 Remote access setting (Int.) 㵪 P279 Caller ID request (Int.) 㵪 P279 Roaming guide (Int.) 㵪 P278 Call barring 㵪 P277 Network Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Function names International Dial Date&Time Settings Other Default settings Auto P61 International Prefix Coversion Settings IDD prefix name : WORLDCALL IDD prefix code : 009130010 P61 Auto international dial Auto international dial : On Target country : Japan +81 P61 Country code list China䇭 86䇮 Taiwan䇭 886䇮 Japan䇭 81䇮 Korea䇭 82䇮 Hong Kong䇭 852䇮 U.S.A.䇭 1䇮 U.K.䇭 44䇮Italy䇭 39䇮 India䇭 91䇮 Indonesia䇭 62䇮 Australia䇭 61䇮 Netherlands䇭 31䇮 Canada䇭 1䇮 Singapore䇭 65䇮 Spain䇭 34䇮 Thailand䇭 66䇮 Germany䇭 49䇮 Philippines䇭 63䇮 France䇭 33䇮 Brazil䇭 55䇮 Vietnam䇭 84䇮 Malaysia䇭 60 P62 Set date&time Auto time set : On P47 Date&Time format Date format : MM/DD/YYYY Time format : 12-hour P106 Hour indication Set sound : Off P245 Character Entry 㵪 P251 P252 P253 P253 Memory status 㵪 P245 Select language Japanese P107 Power Saving Mode Off P103 Reset/Delete 㵪 P245 Software Update 㵪 P326 USB mode setting Photo Mode䋪 P210 Touchpad Setting Vibration feedback: ON Touchpad sensitivity: Standard P30 㵪 P45 Battery Level Unregistered Own number Reference Auto assist setting P239 䋪䋺 If the FOMA USB cable is disconnected, the USB mode automatically returns to "Communication mode". Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Continue on the next page 289 Function names Voice mail Service Call waiting Call forwarding Service Nuisance Call Blocking Caller ID notification Caller ID Request Set in-call arrival act Reference 㵪 P257 Set ring time 㵪 P257 Deactive voice mail 㵪 P257 Check setting 㵪 P257 Play messages 㵪 P257 Voice mail setting 㵪 P257 Check messages 㵪 P257 Notify missed call 㵪 P257 Del. voicemail icon 㵪 P257 Tone/Vibration message notification 㵪 P257 Activate call waiting 㵪 P257 Deactivate call waiting 㵪 P257 Check setting 㵪 P257 Activate 㵪 P259 Deactivate 㵪 P259 Register the forwarding number 㵪 P259 Setting if forwarding number busy 㵪 P259 Check setting 㵪 P259 Register nuisance caller 㵪 P259 Register selected number 㵪 P259 Delete all entries 㵪 P259 Delete last entry 㵪 P259 Check the number of entries 㵪 P259 Activate/Deactivate 㵪 P260 Check setting 㵪 P260 Activate 㵪 P260 Deactivate 㵪 P260 Check setting 㵪 P260 Activate 㵪 P260 Deactivate 㵪 P260 Check setting 㵪 P260 Answer P261 Arrival call act 290 Default settings Activate Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Function names Other Service Default settings Reference Additional Services Unregistered P263 Additional guide Unregistered P264 English guidance Outgoing call: Japanese Incoming call: Japanese P261 Service numbers 㵪 P262 Roaming guidance setting 㵪 P277 Multi number 㵪 P262 Dual Network 㵪 P261 Remote Control 㵪 P262 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting 291 Default Data Stand-by display blend fresh illusion leaf purity refresh water wine Incoming display incoming_call_black 292 incoming_call_white Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Wake-up display/Shutdown display 䂓 Menu Icons pwron 䂓 Frame pwroff Menu Icons Frame Stamp Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting 293 Deco-mail Pictures 294 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting i-motion DiMAGIC eco-motion Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting 295 Dial Keys Assignments to Characters Entry Modes Key Hiragana and Kanji Katakana Alphabetic characters Digits 䈅 䈇䈉 䈋䈍 䈄 䈆 䈈 䈊 䈌 䉝䉟 䉡 䉣䉥 䉜 䉞 䉠 䉢 䉤 .@/:-䌾 䈎䈐 䈒 䈔䈖 䉦 䉨䉪 䉬 䉮 abc ABC 䈘 䈚 䈜䈞䈠 䉰䉲䉴 䉶䉸 def DEF 䈢 䈤 䈧䈩 䈫 䈦 䉺 䉼䉿 䊁䊃 䉾 ghi GHI 䈭 䈮䈯䈰䈱 䊅䊆䊇 䊈䊉 jkl JKL 䈲䈵䈸䈻䈾 䊊䊍 䊐 䊓䊖 mno MNO 䉁 䉂䉃䉄䉅 䊙䊚 䊛 䊜 䊝 pqrs PQRS 䉇䉉䉋 䉆 䉈 䉊 䊟䊡䊣 䊞 䊠 䊢 tuv TUV 䉌 䉍 䉎 䉏䉐 䍵䍃䍶䍃䍷䍃 䍸䍃䍹 wxyz WXYZ 䉒䉕 䉖䉑 (Space) ޕޔ 㧍㧫 䊪 䊭 䊮 䊩 (Space) ޔ ޕ㧍㧫 (Space)! ? - , ' ; ( ) " _ ~ & 䎂 䉘 䉙 䋪2 䇮 䇯 䊷䊶 䋣䋿 䉘 䉙 䇮 䇯 䊷䊶 䋣䋿 !?-,';()"_~&䎂 :䋪2 䋪1䋺 䋤䋪2 Text that has not been confirmed will be indicated with , and more characters can be added/entered. For characters that can take only a voiced sound symbol, 䉘 is added, and for characters that cannot take voiced or semi voiced sound symbol, 䉘 or 䉙 is entered. 䋪2䋺 You can enter these symbols when they are valid in that field. 296 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting List of Symbols and Special Characters Symbol List 䂓 Full symbol 䂓 Half symbol Note • Special characters sent to an i-mode incompatible mobile phone or PC may not be displayed correctly. Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting 297 Pictograph (E-Moji) List 䂓 E-Moji 1 䂓 E-Moji 2 298 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Note • Pictograph (E-Moji) may not be displayed correctly if they are sent to PCs or mobile phones that do not support i-mode. Also, the E-Moji may not be displayed correctly even if they are sent to i-mode phones that support those E-Moji depending on the other party's phone types. • If a mail containing E-Moji 2 is sent to an i-mode phone that does not support E-Moji 2, pictograph (E-Moji) may not be displayed correctly. Emoticon List Category Emoticon Category Emoticon Category Pleasure Anger Embarras sment Cry Sweat Greeting Apathetic Surprise Other Emoticon Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Continue on the next page 299 List of Common Phrases Category Internet Common Phrases @docomo.ne.jp .ne.jp .co.jp .com .or.jp .go.jp .ac.jp http:// www. .html Greeting 䈍䈲䉋 䈉 䈗 䈙 䈇䉁 䈜(Good morning) 䈍䉇䈜䉂䈭 䈘 䈇(Good night) 䈖 䉖䈮䈤 䈲(Hello) 䈖 䉖䈳䉖䈲(Good evening) 䈍∋䉏᭽䈪䈜(See you) 䈍ਭ䈚 䈹䉍 䈪䈜(I haven't seen you for a long time) ᤓᣣ䈲䇮 䈬 䈉 䉅 䈅 䉍 䈏䈫 䈉 䈗 䈙 䈇䉁 䈚 䈢(Thank you for your yesterday support) ⴕ䈦 䈩䈐 䉁 䈜(I will go) 䈇䈦 䈩䉌 䈦 䈚 䉆 䈇(Take care) 䈍⺀↢ᣣ䈍䉄䈪䈫 䈉 䋣 (Happy birthday!) Business 䈇䈧䉅 䈍䈮䈭 䈦 䈩 䈍䉍 䉁 䈜(Thank you for your every support) 䉋 䉐 䈚 䈒 䈍㗿䈇⥌䈚 䉁 䈜(Thank you for your help in advance) ↳䈚 ⸶䈗 䈙 䈇䉁 䈞䉖(I'm sorry) ᄢᄌᄬ␞⥌䈚 䉁 䈚 䈢(I beg your pardon) ⥋ᕆਅ䈘 䈇(Please give me a call as quickly) ዋ䇱䈍ᓙ䈤 㗂䈔䉁 䈜䈎(Could you wait a minute?) ᓟ䈾䈬 䈗 ㅪ⛊䈇䈢 䈚 䉁 䈜(I'll get back to you later) ᓟ䈾䈬 䈗 ㅪ⛊䈇䈢 䈚 䉁 䈜(I'll get back to you later) FAX⏕䉕 䈍㗿䈇䈚 䉁 䈜(Please confirm the facsimile) 㔚ゞㆃᑧ䈱䈢䉄䇮 ㆃ䉏䉁 䈜(I'll be late because of delaying the train) 300 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Category Private Common Phrases ㆆ䈶䈮ⴕ䈖 䈉 (Let's go out) 㘶䉂䈮ⴕ䈐 䉁 䈞䉖䈎䋿 (Shall we go drinking?) ㆃ䉏䉁 䈜(I'll be late) ᄌᦝ䈚 䉁 䈜(I'll change) ਛᱛ䈪䈜(Cancel) వ䈮ⴕ䈐 䉁 䈜(I'll go first) వ䈮Ꮻ䉍 䉁 䈜(I'll be back first) ᤨ㑆䈪䈜(Time's up) 䈚 䈩 䉎 䈱䋿 (What are you doing?) 䈬 䈖 䈮䈇䉎 䈱䋿 (Where are you now?) Reply Thank you! bye-bye! 䌏 䌋 䈪䈜(OK) 䌎 䌇 䈪䈜(No) 䈅 䉍 䈏䈫 䈉 (Thank you) 䈗 䉄䉖䈭䈘 䈇(I 'am sorry) 䉅 䈉 ዋ䈚 ᓙ䈦 䈩䈩(Waite a minute) ᓟ䈪ㅪ⛊䉏䉁 䈜(I'll contact with you later) 䈪䈐 䈭䈇(Cannot make a call now) ੌ⸃䋣䋣 (I see! !) Pictograph idiom 䋨 䈉 䉏䈚 䈇䋩 (with pleasure) (OK) 䋨 䊤 䊑䊤 䊑䋩 (Lovely) 䋨 Ꮻ䉎 䋩 (I'll be back) (䋨 䈲䋿䋩 (what ?) (䈖 䉖䈮䈤 䈲)(Hello) 䋨 㔚ᓙ䈦 䈩 䉁 䈜䋩 (Waiting your call) 䋨 䈉 䉏䈚 䈇䋩 (with pleasure) 䋨 ᔶ䉎 䋩 (Anger) 䋨 䉪 䊥 䉴 䊙䉴 䋩 (Christmas) User composer1/2 Not registered phrase in the Original 1 ~ 10. Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting 301 Combinations of Multiaccess Functions Communication Event Voice call Video Phone Packet communication i-mode Running Application Outgoing Voice call Incoming Outgoing SMS Incoming Scanning function pattern data update Software Update Outgoing Outgoing Incoming Incoming 䂦䋪2䋪5 䂦䋪2 㬍 䂦䋪3 䂦䋪1 䂾 㬍 㬍 䂾䋪6 䂾 Video Phone 㬍 䂦䋪3 䋭 䂦䋪3 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 䂾 i-mode 䂾 䂾 䂦䋪4 䂦䋪3 䋭 䋭 㬍 㬍 㬍 䂾 Scanning function pattern data update 㬍 䂦䋪7 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍䋪8 㬍 㬍 㬍 䂦䋪8 Software Update 㬍 䂾 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍䋪8 㬍 䋭 㬍 䂦䋪8 䂾 : Can be launched. 㬍 : Cannot be launched. 䂦 : Can be launched under certain conditions 䋭 : Not available concurrently. 䋪1䋺 An i-appli cannot be transmitted. 䋪2䋺 If you subscribe to "Call waiting", you can place the current voice call on hold and make/receive another call. 䋪3䋺 While communicating, the incoming log entry is recorded as a missed call. While not communicating, you can answer the incoming call. 䋪4䋺 i-mode will be disconnected, and a call will be made. 䋪5䋺 A call can be made using the Phonebook, Mail (SMS), or the i-mode Browser. 䋪6䋺 You can send SMS if the received mail log contains a mail address. You can send Mail or SMS using the Phonebook. 䋪7䋺 The scanning function pattern data update will be terminated. 䋪8䋺 The i-mode or SMS will be displayed on the Stand-by display when it arrives. 302 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Combinations of Multitask Functions New Application e, t, Voice call Running Application Mail y, 䇭 Video Phone Mail SMS i-appli 䋭 䋭 㬍 㬍 㬍 䋭 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 䂦䋪2 䂦䋪2 㬍 䂾 䂾 㬍 䂾 䂾 㬍 䋭 䋭 䋭 䂾䋪3 䂾䋪3 㬍 䂾 䂾 㬍 䋭 䋭 䋭 䂾 㬍 㬍 䋭 䋭 䋭 㬍 㬍 㬍 䋭 䋭 䋭 㬍 㬍 㬍 䋭 䋭 䋭 Service, Setting 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 䋭 㬍 㬍 䋭 㬍 䋭 㬍 䋭 㬍 䋭 㬍 䂦䋪2 䋭 䂾䋪3 䂾 䋭 䂾 䋭 䂾 䋭 䂾 䋭 䋭 䂾䋪3 䂾 䋭 䂾 䋭 䂾 䋭 䂾 䋭 䂾 䋭 䂾 䋭 䂾 䋭 䂾 䋭 䂾 䋭 䂾 䋭 䂾 䋭 䂾 䋭 㬍 䋭 㬍 䋭 㬍 䋭 㬍 䋭 䂦䋪8 㬍 䂦䋪10 䂦䋪1 䂾 䂾䋪6 䂾 㬍 䂦䋪3 䋭 䂦䋪10 㬍 㬍 㬍 䂾 㬍 䂦䋪12 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍䋪13 㬍 䂦䋪13 i-mode Data box Stationery, Lifekit, Camera 䂾 䂾 㬍 㬍 Phonebook 䂾 㬍 User-defined data open 䂾 㬍 Alarm is running 㬍 㬍 Voice call 㬍 㬍 䂾 䂾 䂾 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 䂦䋪2 䂾 㬍 䂾 䋭 䂾䋪3 㬍 㬍 䂦䋪2 䂾 䋭 䋭 䂾䋪3 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 䋭 㬍 䂦䋪8 䂾 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 䂾 䂾 䋭 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 䋭 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 䂾 㬍 Software Update 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍 䋭 㬍 㬍 䂾 㬍 㬍 㬍 㬍䋪13 㬍 䂦䋪13 Music Playback (BGM)䋪15 䂾 㬍 㬍 䂦䋪1 㬍 䂾 䂾 䋭 䋭 䂦䋪4 䋭 䂦䋪4 䋭 䂾 䋭 䂾 䋭 During a video call䋪14 Scanning function pattern data update 䂾䋪5 䂾䋪5 䂾䋪6 䂾䋪3 䋪9 䂾 : Can run concurrently. 㬍 : Cannot run concurrently. 䂦 : Can be launched under certain conditions 䋭 : Not available concurrently. 䋪1䋺 䋪2䋺 䋪3䋺 䋪4䋺 microSD is not available during music playback. Applications in the New task menu can be executed. Can be launched using the music key. Pause the playback. After the call is terminated, the playback automatically resumes from the paused position. 䋪5䋺 Can be executed only when the Scanning function is turned off. Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Continue on the next page 303 䋪6䋺 If update is possible, continuous operation takes precedence; if update is not possible, cancellation takes precedence. After either operation, the alert will be displayed. 䋪7䋺 An i-appli cannot be transmitted. 䋪8䋺 If you subscribe to "Call waiting", you can place the current voice call on hold and make/receive another call. 䋪9䋺 A call can be made using the Phonebook, Mail (SMS), or the i-mode Browser. 䋪10䋺 While communicating, the incoming log entry is recorded as a missed call. While not communicating, you can answer the incoming call. 䋪11䋺 You can send SMS if the received mail log contains a mail address. You can send Mail or SMS using the Phonebook. 䋪12䋺 The scanning function pattern data update will be terminated. 䋪13䋺 The i-mode or SMS will be displayed on the Stand-by display when it arrives. 䋪14䋺 The Phonebook can be searched during a call, however, mail or SMS cannot be sent. 䋪15䋺 During music playback, the Camera or an i-appli cannot be launched. Services Available from FOMA Handset Services Available from FOMA Handset Directory assistance of fixed line phones and DoCoMo mobile phones (pay service : service and call charges) (No assistance provided for subscribers not listed) Telegraph (charges apply : telegram fee) Time check (charges apply) Weather forecast (charges apply) Police emergency Fire and ambulance Marine emergency call and accident reports Message Dial of disaster (charges apply) Collect call (Charges apply to the receiver) Phone Number (No prefix) 104 (No prefix) 115 (No prefix) 117 Area code + 177 (No prefix) 110 (No prefix) 119 (No prefix) 118 (No prefix) 171 (No prefix) 106 Note • If you use collect call service (106), the receiver of a call is charged for the call cost and commission of \90 (\94.5 including tax) per call (as of 䃂 2007). • When you use directory assistance service (104), you are charged for a call cost and service charge of \100 (\105 with tax included). The service is provided free of charge for those visually impaired or physically disabled in the upper body. For details, contact at 116 (NTT sales contact) from a fixed line phone (as of 䃂䃂 2007) • When you use "Call Forwarding" of fixed line phone and have specified a mobile phone as its forwarding destination, the caller may hear a ring tone even if the mobile phone is busy, out of service area or power OFF depending on the settings of the fixed line phones and mobile phones. • Services such as call to 116 (NTT sales center), Dial Q2, Message Service and credit card calls are unavailable. (Credit card calls can be made from a fixed line phone or public phone to FOMA handset.). • Even when the UIM is not inserted, emergency phone numbers (911, 999, 112, 000, and 08) can be dialed to make an emergency call overseas. However, when the Self Mode is set to "On", emergency calls cannot be made. • This FOMA handset support "✕ᕆㅢႎ⟎ㅢ⍮ (Emergency Location Report)". For a call to 110, 119 or 118 from FOMA handset, the originating location cannot be identified. Depending on your location of dialing or wave condition, a correct location may not be recognized at the emergency call center. If the call is set to Not notify call such as adding "184", the location and the phone number is not notified. The term of opening "✕ᕆㅢႎ⟎ㅢ⍮ (Emergency Location Report)" differs on preparation condition of the emergency call location report. • For a call to 110, 119 or 118 from FOMA handset, the originating location cannot be identified. Because the police or fire department may try to contact you, inform them that you are calling using a mobile phone and give your phone number and detailed information of the place you are. Do not move while you are talking over a call to prevent it from being terminated unexpectedly. Do not turn the power OFF immediately after the call is over; keep FOMA handset ready to receive calls for approximately 10 minutes. • Depending on the area you are calling from, you may not be connected to the local police or fire department. In such case, use a public phone or fixed line phone nearby. 304 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Options and Related Devices Using FOMA handset with various option devices makes it applicable to diversified fields covering personal to business usages. Some of the products listed below may be unavailable in some areas. For details, contact a service counter such as DoCoMo shop. For details of option devices, see the related operation manuals. • Battery Pack L03 • Carry Case S 01 • Rear Cover L04 • FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01 • Desktop Holder L01 • FOMAIndoor Booster Antenna (Stand Type) • Flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch P01 • FOMA USB Cable • Flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch P02 • FOMA AC Adapter 01 • Earphone Jack Conversion Adapter P001 • FOMA AC Adapter 02 • Earphone/microphone with Switch P001 • earphone/microphone with Switch P002 • FOMA Overseas/Domestic AC Adapter 01䋪 • • Stereo Earphone Set P001 • FOMA Dry Cell Battery Adapter 01 • Flat-plug stereo earphone set P01 • Bone conduction microphone/receiver 01 • FOMA DC Adapter 01 • FOMAIndoor Booster Antenna • FOMA DC Adapter 02 • FOMA FOMA Auxiliary Charger Adapter 01 㶎䋺 For overseas use, a compatible conversion plug adapter is required. Video Play Software You need Apple Computer Inc.'s QuickTime Player (free of charge) Version 6.4 or higher (or Version 6.3 + 3GPP) to play videos (in MP4 file format) captured with the FOMA handset on a PC. You can download the QuickTime Player from the following web site: http://www.apple.com/jp/quicktime/download/ Note • You need a PC connected to the Internet to download the software. Separate communication charges may apply for downloading. • For details about operating environment, downloading or operations, visit the above web site. Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting 305 Troubleshooting Symptom Check The FOMA handset cannot be powered on (the FOMA handset cannot be used) • Is the battery pack inserted correctly?→P41 • Is the battery pack charged?→P44 • If mova is enabled under the Dual Network service, some FOMA services are not available. Check whether FOMA is enabled. For details, refer to "Mobile Phone User's Guide [Network services]".→P261 A call cannot be made even if the Dial Keys are pressed • Is Dialing call lock set?→P114 • Is Lock all set?→P113 • Is Self Mode set?→P115 After a call is dialed, a busy tone sounds and the call cannot be connected • Did you enter the city code?→P50 • Is the phone out of service are→P46 The icon indicating the network status remains out of service area and "Out of service area" is displayed • Are you out of service area, or in the week/poor radio wave reception level? →P46 The security code entry screen • Is Lock all set?→P113 is open on the Stand-by display Pressing the Side keys while the FOMA handset is closed does nothing • Is "Keypad unlock" set to "Slide up only"?→P116 Charging is not available (the charging light of the FOMA handset does not light, the illumination blinks in red, the display blinks) • Is the battery pack inserted correctly?→P41 • Is the adapter power plug correctly connected to the outlet or cigarette lighter socket? • Is the AC adapter is connected to the handset properly?→P44 Display is not bright enough • Is "Power save mode" set?→P103 • Is battery power running out? Charge the battery.→P44 A different ringtone sounds for incoming mail • Is the sender saved in the Phonebook with a different ringtone? →P78 • Is the sender saved in the Phonebook under a category with a different ringtone assigned?→P81 Images or melodies set for function do not work and default settings are used • Is the same UIM installed that was inserted when images or melodies were obtained?→P39 The accumulated call charges do not increase • Have you exceeded the call charge maximum? Reset the accumulated call charge to restart counting.→P240 "Please wait." or "No lines/ channels available" is displayed. • Audio line/packet communication facility failed, or audio line/packet communication network is extremely busy. Try again later. "Time out." appears and i-mode mail and SMS cannot be sent. 306 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting 䂓 When overseas Symptom Check The icon indicating the network • Are you out of the international roaming service area, or in a location with weak radio wave reception? status remains as out of service • Check whether you are in an available service area and whether you are area, and the international using a carrier listed with the "DoCoMo WORLD SERVICE User's Guide" or roaming service is not available DoCoMo's "international service web site". • Switch to an available network.→P276 Video calls, i-mode mail, SMS, and packet communication are not available • Check whether you are in an available service area and whether you are using a carrier listed with the "DoCoMo WORLD SERVICE User's Guide" or DoCoMo's "international service web site". • Switch to an available network.→P276 Calls or mail cannot be received • Is "Call Barring Roaming" activated?→P277 After returning to Japan, the network status icon still shows out of service area • Is "Network mode"set to "GSM / only"?→P276 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting 307 Error Messages Error Messages Not enough data memory Please check address The SMS cannot be sent to the entered address. Check the address. Input address No address was entered. Enter an address. Could not send to the following address. Mail could not be sent to the displayed address properly. Reference P174, P175 䋭 P161 Move failed The file/data could not be moved because an error or other problem occurred. 䋭 Some data couldn't save There is data that could not be saved because of not enough storage space in the save location. Delete unnecessary files. Delete unnecessary files. 䋭 No response(408) The handset was unable to connect because there was no response from the site or web page. Try again. 䋭 Same time already set Another i-appli is set to start automatically at the same time. Two or more i-appli cannot start automatically at the same time. Two or more i-appli cannot start automatically at the same time. P186 Same file already exists The file/folder cannot be created or saved because a file/ folder of the same name already exists. MessageF data cannot be received while you are abroad. Remove the check mark from "MessageF" in the "Check new messages" settings. Check the Center Inquiry functions(566) MessageF data cannot be received while you are abroad. Remove the check mark from "MessageF" in the "Check new messages" settings. Remove the check mark from "MessageF" in the "Check new messages" settings. P180 No song! No song exists. Save music. P220 Cannot find file! The corresponding music does not exist. 䋭 Select items The operation cannot be performed because no song is selected. Select a song. Select a song. 䋭 Cannot add songs! Only up to 50 songs can be registered to one playlist. Delete unnecessary music from the playlist. Delete unnecessary music from the playlist. 䋭 P225 Image size over. The total file size of images inserted in the Deco-mail Reduced image in message exceeded the specified value. Delete images in the message. 䋭 Error in image. Does not work correctly. The operation could not be performed properly because the image is invalid. 䋭 View images to "Off" Can't download. Images cannot be downloaded because "Image" is set to "Off." Change the setting. P148 Save image? The data cannot be saved because it is a Flash file that cannot be saved or an image that has not been completely downloaded. 䋭 The maximum number of images that can be inserted in Deco-mail has been reached. Delete images in the message. 䋭 Number of images does over. Reduce image in message 308 Description There was not enough storage space in the inbox when attempting to obtain the selected received attached file. Delete unnecessary received mail. Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Error Messages Description Reference Failed to load screen memo The screen memo cannot be displayed because an error or other problem occurred. 䋭 No screen memos No screen memos have been registered. 䋭 Cannot add screen memo The screen memo cannot be added because an error or other problem occurred. 䋭 Software failed The handset failed to start the i-appli DX. 䋭 Failed capture The image cannot be cropped because an error occurred. 䋭 Enter MCC No country code (MCC) was entered. Enter the country code. Out of service area The operation cannot be performed because the handset is in a location with no signal or out of the FOMA service area. 䋭 The program cannot be downloaded because the handset is out of the service area. Move to a location with a strong signal and then try downloading manually. P217 Enter subject No subject was entered for the schedule or To Do. Enter a subject. P232, P235 This UIM cannot be recognized The UIM cannot be recognized or the wrong UIM is inserted. Reinsert the UIM or insert the correct UIM and then try the operation again. P38 Can't zoom in case of this size. "Select size" is set to "UXGA(1200x1600)" or "SXGA(960 x128)" To use the zoom, set the size to other than these. P132 Certificate is rejected.(tampered) A problem was detected during processing of the certificate for the SSL session. The connection was cancelled. Out of service area P276 䋭 A connection could not be established because an SSL certificate that has been tampered with was received. Unable to download. The data cannot be downloaded because the file is invalid or an error occurred. 䋭 Unable to download. Delete program The program cannot be downloaded because there is no registration for it in My Menu. Register the music channel program provider site in My Menu. P141 This data may not be displayed There is a possibility that this data may not be able to be played. 䋭 Unable to acquire Unable to acquire 䋭 Cannot forward this item The selected data cannot be attached to mail and then sent. 䋭 Set the clock to obtain data. The data cannot be obtained because the clock has not been set. File format not supported The setting cannot be configured because the file is in an unsupported format. This file cannot be attached The file cannot be attached to i-mode mail. P47 䋭 䋭 Some function is limited in UIM Functions are limited because a different UIM card is inserted than the one that was inserted when the data was downloaded from a site or the mail attachment file or MessageR/F data was saved. Invalid content. Change i-motion type for replay The handset is set not to obtain streaming type i-motion. Change the setting. P39 P153 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Continue on the next page 309 Error Messages Reference No more folders can be added because the maximum number of folders has been reached. Too many items are protected No more screen memos can be protected. Invalid content, Download failed The content cannot be downloaded because it is invalid. Incomplete downloading The data is not completely downloaded. 䋭 Size over. Reduce message or delete attached file The mail cannot be sent because it exceeds the maximum possible size for sending. Reduce the size of the message or delete attached files. 䋭 Playback error The data cannot be played back because it contains an error. 䋭 Cannot play this data The data cannot be played back. 䋭 Unable to play. The data could not be played back because an error or other problem occurred. 䋭 Replay period has not yet started. Unable to play. Playback is not possible because today's date is not in the playback period set for the i-motion, music data, or music channel program. Play back the data from a date for which playback is possible. . 䋭 Replay is restricted mm/dd/yyyy, hh:mm 䌾 MM/DD/YYYY, HH:MM Playback is not possible because today's date is not in the playback period set for the i-motion, music data, or music channel program. Play back the data during the playback period. 䋪 The year, month, day, and time are indicated in the X part. 䋭 Replay is restricted mm/dd/yyyy, hh:mm 䌾 MM/DD/YYYY, HH:MM Playback is not possible because today's date is not in the playback period set for the i-motion, music data, or music channel program. Play back the data within the playback period. 䋪 The year, month, day, and time are indicated in the X part. 䋭 Unable to obtain data due to replay restriction data error The data cannot be obtained because it is invalid or today's date is not in the playback period. 䋭 no recent played info! The data cannot be played back because there is no played information. 䋭 Size of this page is not supported The reception was stopped and only the obtained portion is displayed because the site or web page is large. 䋭 Size of this page is not supported The downloading/obtaining of data was stopped because the data exceeded the maximum size of data that can be downloaded/obtained. 䋭 Unable to download. The data cannot be obtained because the data size exceeds the maximum for retrieving. 䋭 Unable to download. Data exceeds maximum size (452) The data could not be received because it exceeds the maximum size. 䋭 Unable to download, Data exceeds maximum size The data cannot be downloaded because it exceeds the maximum size of data that can be downloaded. 䋭 Up to 10 screen memos can be protected. No more memos can be protected. 310 Description Cannot create folder 䋭 䋭 䋭 Up to 10 screen memos can be protected. unable to protect it. URL address changed (301) The site or web page is automatically forwarding to an URL or the URL has changed. . 䋭 Connection failed(403) The handset cannot connect to the site or web page. 䋭 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Error Messages Description Reference The handset will delete the attached file and then send the message because the file is copyrighted. 䋭 Cannot be deleted The data cannot be deleted because there was an error. 䋭 There is no bookmark that can be deleted. The operation cannot be performed because there is no bookmark that can be deleted. 䋭 There is nota messageto delete There is no message that can be deleted because all messages are protected. 䋭 There is nobookmark thatcan be deleted. There is no message that can be deleted because no message exists or all messages are protected. 䋭 Failed to delete The handset failed to delete the data because an error or other problem occurred. 䋭 Canceled deleting Deleting was cancelled deleting because an error or other problem occurred. 䋭 Number of creating folder is 20EA. A new folder cannot be created because the number of folders that can be created (20) has been exceeded. Service is not registered You have not subscribed for the i-mode service. 䋭 Service is not provided The handset failed to send the SMS because the service is not provided. 䋭 Format not supported The operation cannot be performed because it is not supported. 䋭 Not supported The operation cannot be performed because it is not supported. 䋭 Page is not found(404) The site or web page does may not exist or the URL may be wrong. Check the URL and then try again. 䋭 File with copyright will be deleted P195 No content is available (204) There is no data available at the specified site. 䋭 No requested software The specified software cannot be started because it does not exist. 䋭 Requested software unavailable The operation cannot be performed because the specified software cannot be started. 䋭 No messages There was no message that matched the conditions specified for the filter operation. 䋭 No data There was no mail that matched the conditions specified for the filter operation. 䋭 Unable to retrieve the requested URL (504) The site or web page does may not exist or the URL may be wrong. Check the URL and then try again. 䋭 Invalid number! An invalid number was entered or no number was entered. Enter a valid number. 䋭 Invalid address The message cannot be sent because the mail address is invalid. 䋭 3 i-applis have been already registered for auto-start The number of i-appli that can be set to start automatically is up to three. 䋭 Please wait The handset failed to send the SMS. Wait a while and then try again. 䋭 Low battery. Can't update There is not enough battery power. Charge the battery. Invalid end time f the start date and end date of a schedule event are the same, the end time is set to a time earlier than the start time. Set an end time that is later than the start time. P232, P235 The end date is set earlier than the start date. Set the schedule event so that the end date is later than the start date. P232, P235 Invarid end date P42 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Continue on the next page 311 Error Messages Description Receiving. Please wait The handset is receiving data. Wait a while. Cannot receive message The selected message cannot be received because the host address set for "Host Selection" is wrong. Check the setting and then try again. There is no empty space in INBOX. Please delete unnecessary mail to receive SMS SMS cannot be received because there is not enough storage space in the inbox. Delete unnecessary received mail. Inbox is full The i-motion cannot be received because there is not enough storage space in the inbox. Delete unnecessary received mail. SMS cannot be moved/copied from the UIM because there is not enough storage space in the inbox. Delete unnecessary received mail. 䋭 P149 P174, P175 P174, P175 No messages There are no received messages. 䋭 Reception rejected The handset failed to send the SMS because the reception was rejected. 䋭 Canceled receiving The reception was cancelled. 䋭 No Certificates There are no SSL certificates. 䋭 Schedule is full There is not enough storage space for Schedule. Delete unnecessary schedule events. P235 Already set The mail address cannot be set because it is already set for auto sort. 䋭 Already exists The network cannot be registered because it is already registered. 䋭 Host name already exists The host name cannot be registered because it is already registered. 䋭 Already exist The network cannot be registered because it is already registered. 䋭 Same URL already saved The URL cannot be saved because it is already registered on the FOMA handset. 䋭 Already received message on server The message cannot be sent because it is already stored on the server. 䋭 All data is invalid. The operation cannot be performed because all the data is invalid. 䋭 Could not parse all mail to parameters Some of the parameters exceed the limit. Cannot playf or limit size The file attached to the i-mode mail cannot be played because it exceeds the limit size. 䋭 Cannot play for limit size The file attached to the i-mode mail cannot be played because it exceeds the limit size. 䋭 Connection failed(400) The handset was unable to connect properly because of an error on the access point. 䋭 Unable to connect. 312 Reference 䋭 Unable to connect because of the network problem. Please retry after a while. Connection interrupted The connection was interrupted because an error or other problem occurred. 䋭 Host address is empty There is no host address entered. Enter the host address. P145 Host name is empty There is no host name entered. Enter the host name. P145 Access point is empty There is no access point number entered. Enter the access point number. P145 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Error Messages Connection failed Description Reference A connection cannot be established because the host address set for "Host Selection" is wrong. Check the setting and then try again. P149 Time out. The i-mode center is congested. Wait a while and then try again. 䋭 Time out. Resume download? The attached file linked to the i-mode mail could not be downloaded within the set time. Do you want to try downloading again? 䋭 Failed set ! The ringtone could not be set because an error occurred. 䋭 Setting self mode The operation cannot be performed because self mode is set. Set self mode to "OFF". P115 Not able to insert a chosen image The selected image could not be inserted because it exceeds the specified value. 䋭 Service unavailable The handset cannot connect to the network because it is out of the service area or in a location with no signal. Move to a location with a strong signal and then set the network. 䋭 The list of networks cannot be displayed because there is no UIM inserted. Insert the UIM and then try using the handset. P38 Service unavailable The network list could not be saved with "UPLMN select by list" of "Preferred NW lists." 䋭 No decorations. Cannot save as template. The template cannot be saved because there are no decorations. 䋭 Preparing to send The handset is preparing to send the i-mode mail. Wait a while. 䋭 Address is not valid(451) Check the address.(451) The mail could not be sent properly. Check the address and then try again. P161, P181 Server is full(551) The mail/SMS could not be sent properly. 䋭 Transmission failed(XXX) The mail could not be sent properly. 䋪 A number that indicates the type of error appears instead of X. 䋭 Service unavailable Could not send mail Server is full(551) The mail space for the recipient is full. Outbox is full SMS cannot be copied/moved from the UIM because there is not enough storage space in the outbox. Delete unnecessary sent and unsent mail. 䋭 P174, P176, P177, P178 No messages There is no outbox mail 䋭 Transmission rejected. The sending of the SMS was rejected. 䋭 Cancelled sending Sending was cancelled. 䋭 Up-to-date software The i-appli cannot be updated because it has already been updated to the latest version. 䋭 This software contains an error The i-appli data cannot be downloaded because it contains an error. 䋭 Downloaded canceled due to the SW error The i-appli data cannot be downloaded because it contains an error. 䋭 unsupported card format. please format again. The format of the microSD memory card is not supported. Use the FOMA L705i to format the microSD memory card. The data cannot be displayed because it is not supported. The data cannot be displayed because it is not supported. Invalid title Invalid characters or no characters were entered for the title name. Enter a valid title name. P207 䋭 䋭 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Continue on the next page 313 Error Messages Description Reference The handset searched for a network for the set amount of time, but no network could be found Check whether the "Switch 3G/GSM" setting is correct. P276 The operation cannot be performed because Dialing Restriction is set. Remove the checkmark for "Keypad dial lock" in the Call/Mail lock settings. P114 Unable to download in this time The program cannot be downloaded during this time zone. Download the program during the distribution time. 䋭 Unable to download. Check your battery is fully charged. There is not enough battery power to download the program. Charge the battery until appears. Download failed The data could not be downloaded because an error or other problem occurred. 䋭 Already downloaded An i-appli of the same version has already been downloaded. 䋭 Time out Keypad dial lock i-mode mail service is busy. The line is very busy. Wait a while and then try again. Please try again later(XXX) 䋪 A number that indicates the type of error appears instead of X. 䋭 Security code error The security code is incorrect. Enter the correct security code. P110 Call rejected An incoming call was rejected because it was from a caller not registered in the phonebook. To receive calls from callers not in the phonebook, set "Memory reject call" to "OFF." P121 An incoming call was rejected because it was from a caller registered in "Reject on list." P118 An incoming call was rejected because "Reject all calls" is set to "Disconnect all." P119 When retrieving i-Channel information, the handset failed to obtain the information because some or all channel information could not be retrieved. Move to a location with a strong signal and then press Q for at least 1 second in stand-by to receive the information. 䋭 The connection was suspended because the set amount of time elapsed without finding the other party. Check the distance from the other party, angle, and operating procedure. P212, P213 Exchange failed Communication failed because, for instance, the operation was suspended. 䋭 Battery low The battery level is low. Charge the battery. Invalid data The operation cannot be performed because the data is invalid. Input data The country name and country code were not entered. Enter the country name and country code. Receiving canceled Downloading was suspended because the handset went out of the service area. Move to a location with a strong signal. Failed to retrieve channel information Connection suspended 314 P42 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting P42 䋭 P62 䋭 Error Messages Description Reference Low battery Cannot start camera-mode The operation cannot be performed because there is not enough battery power. Charge the battery. P42 Low battery Can't use The function cannot be used because there is not enough battery power. Charge the battery. P42 Low battery Exit microSD mode microSD mode ended because there is not enough battery power. Charge the battery. P42 No attachable file There is no file that can be attached. Attached file is deleted The attached file will be deleted and then the mail will be forwarded because a different UIM card is inserted than the one that was inserted when the i-mode mail attachment file was received. P39 Template is full There is not enough storage space for Template. Delete unnecessary templates. P165 Size over The size of the template exceeds the specified value. Delete the message or inserted images. P165 Phonebook is full There is not enough storage space for the phonebook entry. Delete unnecessary phonebook entries. P87 䋭 Failed Clipping The video could not be edited because an error occurred. 䋭 Check failed The handset failed to check for new SMS. 䋭 Registration is in progress(554) The operation cannot be performed because user registration is taking place. Wait a while and then try again. 䋭 No bookmark data. The bookmark cannot be added because there is no bookmark data that can be added. 䋭 Incomplete data saved The bookmark cannot be added because there is no bookmark data that can be added. Incomplete data was saved. To retrieve the rest of the data, perform the operation manually. P217 The period specified is incorrect. Set a period from 2 to 31 days. P234 Day is out of range Too much data was entered. Sending is not possible because too many characters were entered in the site or web page input field. Reduce the number of characters and then try sending again. 䋭 Input error(205) The input data contains an error. Check the input data. 䋭 Authentication type is not supported (401) A connection cannot be established because the authentication type is not supported. 䋭 Authentication failed The wrong security code was entered. Enter the correct security code. 䋭 Authentication canceled(401) The connection was suspended because authentication failed. 䋭 Enter correct Network security code. The network security code is wrong. Enter the correct network security code. 䋭 Enter MNC. The MNC was not entered. Enter the MNC. P276 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Continue on the next page 315 316 Error Messages Description Reference Unable to acquire remaining data Data deleted While attempting to download the remaining data of a partially saved file, the data was deleted because an error occurred and downloading failed. 䋭 Password is not correct(401) The user name or password entered in the authentication screen of a site or web page was wrong. Enter the information again. 䋭 Music channel downloading Downloading or playback is not possible because a music channel program is being downloaded. Wait a while and then try again. 䋭 Program is downloading. Can not start Data back up The data backup cannot be started because a music channel program is being downloaded.You can press M [Cancel] to cancel downloading. 䋭 Program is downloading. Can not update pattern data. The pattern data cannot be updated because a music channel program is being downloaded.You can press M [Cancel] to cancel downloading. 䋭 Program is downloading. Can not start ADL. The ADL cannot be started because a music channel program is being downloaded.You can press M [Cancel] to cancel downloading. 䋭 Program is downloading. Can not start i-application Communication with the i-appli is not possible because a music channel program is being downloaded.You can press M [Cancel] to cancel downloading. 䋭 Program is downloading. Can not start i-mode An i-mode connection cannot be established because a music channel program is being downloaded.You can press M [Cancel] to cancel downloading. 䋭 Program is downloading. Can not start PPP A PPP connection cannot be established because a music channel program is being downloaded. You can press M [Cancel] to cancel downloading. 䋭 Receiving failed. Because mail to indicate can't replace it The mail cannot be received because the handset is attempting to overwrite the mail that is currently displayed. 䋭 There are no files There are no files in the folder. 䋭 This file is not supported. The file cannot be played because the data is not supported or corrupted. 䋭 Invalid File(493) The operation cannot be performed because the file that was obtained is corrupted. 䋭 Cannot find file The operation cannot be performed because the selected file does not exist. 䋭 File error The operation cannot be performed because the file is invalid. 䋭 File is deleted The file will be deleted and then the mail sent because a pasted file cannot be forwarded. 䋭 Failed to create file The file could not be moved/copied because an error occurred. 䋭 Attached file size is over The maximum attachment size has been exceeded. 䋭 Cannot save file The file could not be saved because an error or other problem occurred. 䋭 Incorrect folder name Invalid characters or no characters were entered for the folder name. Enter a valid folder name. 䋭 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Error Messages Description Reference The selected folder cannot be deleted. 䋪 The corresponding folder name is displayed instead of XXX. 䋭 Delete invalid address. An invalid address was deleted. 䋭 Invalid data The operation cannot be performed because the wrong file is selected. XXX folder can't delete The operation cannot be performed because the data is invalid. Invalid title is included Invalid characters or no characters were entered for the folder name. Enter a valid folder name. Bookmark is full. There is not enough storage space for the bookmark. Delete unnecessary bookmarks. Could not parse all bookmark data ␜䈪䈐 䈭䈇䉅 䈱䈏䈅 䉍 䉁 䈜 Some bookmarks cannot be displayed because there are too many bookmarks. 䋭 䋭 P143, P144 䋭 No bookmarks. There are no bookmarks added. 䋭 Cannot add bookmark. The bookmark cannot be added because an error or other problem occurred. 䋭 Unknown error. The operation cannot be performed because an unknown error occurred. 䋭 Cannot add to playlist! The song cannot be added because the maximum number of playlists/songs in each playlist has been added. Delete unnecessary playlists/songs. P225 Cannot create playlist! Only up to 10 playlists can be added. Delete unnecessary playlists. P225 There is not a message tocancel protection Protection cannot be cancelled because there is no protected mail. 䋭 There is nota message to protect Protection cannot be cancelled because there are no protected messages. 䋭 There is not a messageto protect There is no mail that can be protected because all mail is already protected. 䋭 There is not a message to cancel protection There is no mail that can be protected because all mail is already protected. 䋭 Not protected message? There are no protected messages. 䋭 Retention period has expired(492) An unobtained attachment file cannot be obtained because the retention period at the i-mode center has expired. 䋭 Network Unavailable The data could not be saved because an error occurred. 䋭 Canceled saving Saving was cancelled because an error or other problem occurred. 䋭 No save area The operation cannot be performed because there is not enough storage space in the save location. Delete unnecessary files. 䋭 Home page not set A connection cannot be established because the home page is not set. P148 Home page disabled The home page is set to "Disable." Set it to "Enable." P148 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Continue on the next page 317 Description Reference Handset memory is full Error Messages No more settings can be configured. Delete unnecessary items. 䋭 Cannot send message for size over. Delete message The mail cannot be sent because the maximum number of characters that can be entered for a message has been exceeded. Reduce the size of the message. Reduce the size of the message. P161 Cannot save message for size over. Delete message The mail cannot be sent because the maximum number of characters that can be entered for a message has been exceeded. Reduce the size of the message. P161 Cannot send message for number of images over. Reduce image in message The mail cannot be sent because the number of inserted images exceeds the specified number. Delete images in the message. P162 Cannot save message for number of images over. Reduce image in message The mail cannot be saved because the number of inserted images exceeds the specified number. Delete images in the message. P162 Message entry size exceeds limited. Delete message The maximum possible number of characters for the message has been exceeded. Reduce the size of the message. P161 Cannot edit message The message cannot be edited. Cannot save imagewithout playing The data cannot be saved because it is a Flash file. The data cannot be saved because it is an unplayed Flash animation. 䋭 Unsent message is full There is not enough storage space for unsent messages. Delete unnecessary unsent or sent messages. P174, P176, P177, P178 No messages There are no unsent messages. 䋭 There's empty input. Input required The operation cannot be performed because some items have not be entered. 䋭 Empty message cannot be saved An empty message cannot be saved. Expire Music channel contract, Delete program The program cannot be downloaded because you have not subscribed to the music channel. Subscribe Music channel. 䋭 Music player is running. The operation cannot be performed because music player is running. Press P to end music player. 䋭 Received invalid data The operation cannot be performed because the received data contains an error. 䋭 Invalid Data(XXX) The specified site or web page is not supported. 䋪 A number that indicates the type of error appears instead of X. Check whether the URL is correct. 䋪 A number that indicates the type of error appears instead of X. 䋭 䋭 䋭 Display is not possible because the received data contains an error. 䋪 A number that indicates the type of error appears instead of X. Invalid date(pop#2) The value is outside the setting range of the date search. P238 Invalid file name is included The file or folder cannot be saved or created because an invalid character was entered for the file name or folder nam. 䋭 There is no MessageF data. 䋭 No messages 318 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Error Messages Description Reference No messages. There is no MessageR data. Folder is full There is not enough storage space for MessageR/F data. Delete unnecessary MessageR/F data. P151 Message data is broken The message cannot be displayed because the message data is broken. 䋭 Memory is full There is not enough storage space for memos. Delete unnecessary memos. Memory is full The operation cannot be performed because there is not enough storage space in the save location. Delete unnecessary files. 䋭 P241 䋭 Not enough memory Can't save Only up to 10 access points can be registered. Delete unnecessary access points. Not enough memory. Can't record A video cannot be recorded because there is not enough memory. Not enough memory There is not enough storage space in the move/copy destination. Delete unnecessary files. P195, P190, P202, P204 Memory shortage The process will be suspended because there is not enough memory. 䋭 Memory shortage Stop Browser i-mode will end because there is not enough memory. Memory shortage Return to Main Menu The process will be suspended because there is not enough memory. Folder is full There is not enough storage space for both received mail and MessageR/F data. Delete unnecessary received mail and MessageR/F data. P151, P174, P175 Characters are too long to enter No more characters can be entered because the number of entered characters exceeds the maximum. 䋭 Loading. Wait a while because data is being loaded. 䋭 Loading. Please wait. Wait a while because data is being loaded. Reject list full There is not enough storage space for the list. Delete unnecessary items. 䋭 International roaming service denied The operation cannot be performed because you have not subscribed to WORLD WING. 䋭 Can't save over 50 songs Only up to 50 songs can be added to Quick playlist. Delete unnecessary music from Quick playlist. P225 Bookmark is full There is not enough storage space for the bookmark. Delete unnecessary bookmarks. P144 Activation failure because of different UIM The i-appli could not be started automatically because of the UIM operation limit function. Insert the UIM that was inserted when the file was obtained and then try again. P39 Invalid UIM, requested service not available. The mail cannot be sent because of the UIM operation limit function. Insert the UIM that was inserted when the file was obtained and then try again. P39 P149 䋭 䋭 䋭 䋭 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Continue on the next page 319 Error Messages Description Reference A different UIM card is inserted than the one that was inserted when the data was downloaded from a site or the mail attachment file or MessageR/F data was saved. Use the data with the same UIM card that was inserted when you downloaded or saved the data. P39 The mail cannot be sent because of the UIM operation limit function. Insert the UIM that was inserted when the mail was created and then try again. P39 Activation failure because of different UIM The i-appli could not be started automatically because of the UIM operation limit function. Insert the UIM that was inserted when the file was obtained and then try again. P39 *****Not enough memory. An i-appli that is used in conjunction with the UIM inserted at the time of download from a site or other location cannot be started. Use the i-appli with the same UIM inserted that was inserted when the i-appli was downloaded. P39 Some data applicable to restrictions such as images cannot be displayed because a different UIM card is inserted than the one that was inserted when the data was downloaded from a site or the mail attachment file or MessageR/F data was saved. Use the data with the same UIM card that was inserted when you downloaded or saved the data. P39 A different UIM card is inserted than the one that was inserted when the screen memo was saved. Use the screen memo with the same UIM card inserted that was inserted when you saved the data. P39 UIM reading The UIM is being read. Wait a while and then try again. 䋭 UIM not ready The UIM card is not inserted. Insert the UIM and then try again. P38 UIM not ready The UIM card is not inserted. Insert the UIM and then try using the handset. P38 Invalid UIM requested software can't start The specified software cannot be started because a different card is inserted than the one inserted when the software was downloaded from a site or other location. Use the i-appli with the same UIM inserted that was inserted when the i-appli was downloaded. P39 Invalid UIM. Start not possible. An i-appli that is used in conjunction with the UIM inserted at the time of download from a site or other location cannot be started. Use the i-appli with the same UIM inserted that was inserted when the i-appli was downloaded. P39 "i-appli To" function is not set The i-appli cannot be started because there is no checkmark added to the "Site i-appli to" setting. Add a checkmark and then try again. P189 Cannot receiving i-Channel information The i-Channel information cannot be received because the UIM is not inserted properly or there is a problem with the UIM. Check the UIM. P38 Content length exceeds replayable size for i-motion The data cannot be obtained because the data size exceeds the maximum for retrieving. 䋭 Receiving data exceeds replayable size for i-motion The data cannot be obtained because the data size exceeds the maximum for retrieving 䋭 Check new message is set all OFF There are no checkmarks added for all items of the "Check new messages" settings. Add checkmarks to these items and then try playback again. Invalid UIM, requested service not available. Invalid UIM cannot send Invalid UIM, incorrect display Invalid UIM, incorrect display 320 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting P180 Error Messages Description Reference microSD not Ready There is no microSD memory card inserted in the FOMA handset. Insert a microSD memory card. P206 microSD card ejected The microSD memory card was ejected while the contents of the microSD memory card were displayed. Insert a microSD memory card. P206 microSD memory card is not available The microSD memory card was not recognized. Insert the microSD memory card properly. P206 microSD card not ready There is no microSD memory card inserted in the FOMA handset. Insert a microSD memory card. P206 PIN1 (PIN2) is locked. If the wrong PIN1/PIN2 code is entered 3 times in a row, the PIN lock is set. Enter the PUK code. P111 PUK code not recognized If the wrong PIN1/PIN2 code is entered 3 times in a row, the PIN lock is set. Enter the PUK code. P111 PIN1 code not recognized The PIN1 Unlock Code is wrong. Enter the correct PIN1 Unlock code. P111 PUK code error The entered PUK code is wrong. Enter the correct PUK code. P112 PUK code not recognized If you enter the wrong PUK code 10 times in a row, the PUK code is locked. Contact the service counter of a DoCoMo shop. Back cover of this manual PUK blocked If you enter the wrong PUK code 10 times in a row, the PUK code is locked. Contact the service counter of a DoCoMo shop. Back cover of this manual No PLMN found There is no network that can be selected. 䋭 SD audio music is running The operation cannot be performed because the SD audio player is running.Press P to end music player. 䋭 Please check SMS Center settings The handset failed to send the SMS. Check the "SMS Center" setting. SSL session cannot be established. A connection could not be established because an SSL certificate that has been tampered with was received or an SSL error occurred. SSL session failed. A problem was detected during processing of the certificate for the SSL session. The connection was cancelled. P182 䋭 䋭 A session was not possible because of an authentication error on the server. Root certificate is not valid. The certificate of the FOMA handset is set to invalid. Change the setting to establish a connection. P152 SSL session was terminated. The SSL session was terminated because a suspend operation was performed. 䋭 To do is full There is not enough space in the storage location for To Do. Delete unnecessary To Do entries. P236 Please set "To type" receiver There is no address set for the To field. Set at least one address for the To field. P161 URL is too long to register The URL cannot be registered because it contains too many characters. 䋭 Invalid URL The handset cannot connect to the site or Internet because the URL is invalid. 䋭 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Continue on the next page 321 Error Messages 322 Description Reference No URL history The operation cannot be performed because there is no history of connecting to the URL. Unplug the USB cable The FOMA USB connection cable is connected. Disconnect the cable and then try again. P210 Disconnect USB cable for microSD mode. Switching to communication mode is not possible while the FOMA USB connection cable is connected. Disconnect the cable and then try switching. P210 㱍 error An error occurred while an i-appli was starting. Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting 䋭 䋭 Warranty and After-sales Service Warranty • Be sure to receive a warranty attached to FOMA handset you purchase. Read contents of the warranty and confirm items such as the "shop name and the date of purchase" and keep it in a safe place. If necessary items are not described, immediately contact the shop you purchased. The warranty for free repair is valid for 1 year from the date of purchase. • This product and its accessories are subject to change, in part or whole, for improvement without prior notice. • Saved contents of phonebook and other functions may be altered or lost by failure, repair or other handling of FOMA handset. You are recommended to note down the contents of phonebook and other functions as a precaution. In repair, etc. of FOMA handset, information downloaded with i-mode or i-appli is not transferred to FOMA handset in repair, with some exceptions, because of the Copyright Law. 䋪 This FOMA handset allows you to save files, such as still images stored in the Data box onto the microSD memory card. 䋪 If you have a PC, use proprietary datalink Software and the FOMA USB cable 01 (optional) to transfer/save data stored in the Phonebook to the PC. After-sales Service Malfunctioning Before requesting for repair, check by yourself referring to "Troubleshooting" in this manual. If the problem still persists, contact䊶 Repairs on the back of this manual. When Repair is Assumed Necessary by Contacting Take your FOMA handset to a service center designated by DoCoMo. Be sure to check the opening hours of the service center. Note that you must bring the warranty. 䂓 In Warranty period • The FOMA handset will be repaired at no charge subject to the conditions of the warranty. • The warranty must be presented when requesting for repair. Even in the warranty period, you will be charged for repair if the warranty is not presented or the trouble or damage is caused by your inappropriate handling. • The subscriber is charged even during the warranty period for repair of failures caused by the use of devices or consumable items that are not DoCoMo-specified. 䂓 Repair may not be possible in the following cases: • Repair may not be possible when perspiration is detected by the moisture detection seal; when corrosion due exposure to moisture, condensation or sweat is found in a test result; or if any of the internal boards are damaged or deformed. Since these conditions are outside the scope of the warranty, any repairs, if at all possible, will be charged. 䂓 After expiration of the warranty • All repairs that are requested are charged. 䂓 Replacement parts • Replacement parts (parts required to maintain production function) will be kept in stock for at least 6 years in principle after termination of production. However, repair may still not be possible due to a lack of replacement parts depending on the failure. Even after the parts holding period, some failures may be repairable. Contact䊶 Repairs on the back of this manual. Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting 323 Notes • Do not modify FOMA handset or its accessories. - Fire, injury or damage may result. - In order to prevent interference of radio waves or network troubles, technical standards are defined for FOMA handset and UIM by law. FOMA handset or UIM that do not meet these technical standards may not be used. - If the FOMA handset modified (in a way such as parts replacement, remodeling or painting) will be repaired only after the handset has been restored to the original conditions (containing DoCoMo genuine parts only). Note that, depending on the details of modification, repair may be refused. - Repair of failure or damage caused by modification is charged even in the warranty period. • Do not remove rating stickers put on FOMA handset. Rating stickers function to certify that the FOMA handset meets the technical standards. If the stickers are removed intentionally or replaced disabling to confirm their contents, repair may be refused because compliance to the technical standards cannot be confirmed. • Various function settings and information including total call time may be cleared (reset) by failure, repair or other handling of FOMA handset. In such a case, you have to make function settings again. • FOMA handset contains magnetic components given below. Keep cash cards and other objects vulnerable to magnetism off such components or they may become unusable. Magnetic components : Speaker and Earpiece • When FOMA handset has got wet or moistened, immediately turn the power OFF, remove the battery pack and bring FOMA handset to repair shop. Note that, depending on the conditions of FOMA handset, it may not be reparable. Phonebook and Downloaded Data • Note down and keep separately the data you registered in your FOMA handset. DoCoMo will not accept any liability whatsoever for changes of information or loss of information. • The Data you created or imported or downloaded from external sources may be altered or lost as a result of changing the FOMA handset model or repairing the FOMA handset. DoCoMo is not responsible for data alteration or loss under these circumstances. Also, at DoCoMo's convenience, your FOMA handset may be replaced with a substitute product instead of repaired. In this case, only a part of the data on the product can be transferred to the substitute. For this FOMA handset, images and melody downloaded from i-mode official site are transferred at repair. (Some contents may not be transferable. Moreover, depending on severity of the failure, transfer of contents may be disabled.) Moreover, depending on severity of the failure, transfer of contents may be disabled.) About the i-mode Malfunction Check Site You can check by yourself whether your FOMA handset is properly sending / receiving mail, downloading images and melodies. 324 i-mode Menu screen䋨 P138䋩X"䌩 Menu"X"䈍⍮䉌 䈞(Information)"X "䉰䊷䊎 䉴䊶 ᯏ⢻(Service/Function)"X"䌩 䊝䊷䊄 (i-mode)"X"䌩 䊝䊷䊄 㓚⸻ᢿ(i-mode malfunction check site)" Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting (Image to be added) Note • Packet communications charges do not apply for the i-mode malfunction check. (Charges apply when accessing from overseas). • Test items will differ depending on FOMA handset model. Test items may change. • When confirming operations for each test item, perform the test after carefully reading the warnings on the site. • When connecting to the i-mode malfunction check test site, and when performing the mail send test, your FOMA handset's information (model name, mail address, etc.) is automatically sent to the server (i-mode malfunction check server). The information sent is used only for i-mode malfunction check. • After the check, if you feel that there is a malfunction, call the "Repairs" number described on the back of the manual. Software Update Updating Software This function checks whether FOMA handset software requires update and, if required, updates the software by downloading a part of it using packet communication䋪. When software update is necessary, you will be informed of it with DoCoMo's web site and "䈍⍮䉌 䈞䋧䊓䊦䊒 (News & Help)" of iMenu. Software may be updated in the following two methods : "Now update" and "Timer update". • Now update : Update immediately when you want. • Timer update : When you set a schedule to update, software is automatically updated on the scheduled day. 䋪䋺 Communication charges do not apply for packet communication for software update. • • • • • • • • • • Software update is available even if you have set connection destination from i-mode destination. Fully charge the battery pack before updating software. Software update (downloading and rewriting) may take a while. Updating software with the "PIN1 code request" set to "ON" displays the PIN1 code entry screen in the automatic restart after installing the software. You cannot make/receive calls or perform communication until you enter the correct PIN1 code. You cannot make or receive calls or use communication or other functions while updating software (you can receive voice calls while downloading). You are recommended to perform software update without moving under conditions with strong radio wave reception level and 3 antenna icons displayed. If the radio wave reception level go worse during software download or download is suspended, retry software update under good radio wave reception level. If you check software update after software update, message "No Update Required: appears. After software update, an icon indicating the i-mode Center storage status disappears. When mail is delivered during software update with "Receive option" set to "ON", screen indicating that there is mail may not appear after software update. During pattern data update, information (handset model, serial No., etc.) specific to your mobile phone is automatically sent to the server (software update server managed by DoCoMo). DoCoMo does not use the sent information for other purposes than Software update. Software update is disabled in the following cases: - While Lock all is set - While another function is running - When the date and time are not set - When the FOMA card (UIM) is not inserted - When the battery is not charged full - When "Out of service area" appears at the top of the screen - Power is OFF - During international roaming Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Continue on the next page 325 Note • Never remove the battery pack during software update. Doing so may cause update to fail. • Software update can be carried out with data such as phonebook, camera images, downloaded data maintained. Note that, however, such data may not be protected depending on the conditions of FOMA handset (failure, damage, wetting, etc.). You are recommended to back up important data (some data including downloaded data cannot be backed up). • When software update has failed, "Rewriting Failed" appears, disabling any kind of operations. In that case, you have to bring FOMA handset to repair center specified by DoCoMo. Starting Software Update Check whether to need to update FOMA handset software. M[Menu]X (Settings)X"Others"X"Software update"XEnter your security code • When Software update has been scheduled, the Schedule notification screen will be appeared. Check the contents on confirmation screen and press "OK" • The communication starts and inquire to the center. If update is needed, the software update confirmation screen will be appeared. Immediately Updating Software On the software update confirmation screen, select "Update now" X"OK" on the download start screen. • Download starts, and when the download is completed, the confirmation screen for software rewriting is displayed. "OK" • The rewriting starts, and the software update confirmation screen is appeared after completing. • All the operations will be disabled during rewriting. "OK" Updating Software on Scheduled Date You can select the date and time to update software. Select "Reserve"on the software update confirmation screen • The desired date and time selection screen is appeared. Select the date and time • When the reserved time comes, the FOMA terminal starts updating software automatically. • When you select "Others" on the desired date and time screen, you can set both desired date and time individually. 326 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Note • • • • In Scheduled date software update, the times for reservation on the sever is displayed. Note that if you perform the other functions, the software update does not launch at the scheduled time. If you perform alarm function, the software update may not be launched. If you perform "Clear memory"(P246) after completing the reservation, the software update may not be launched at the scheduled time. Reschedule the time for update. Scanning function Protecting Mobile Phone from Dangerous Data First, update the pattern data to the latest one. As for data and programs downloaded to FOMA handset from site or via i-mode mail, etc., you can detect and delete data or disable applications that may cause troubles. • Pattern data is used for checking. Update pattern data, which is upgraded as needed when new problems are detected.→P328 • Scanning Function provides a means to protect FOMA handset from data that may invade when viewing web site or receiving mail, etc., causing troubles of FOMA handset. Note that this function cannot avoid occurrence of troubles unless pattern data specific to individual troubles has not been downloaded to FOMA handset or such pattern data does not exist. • Pattern data has different contents depending on mobile phone models. Note that, therefore, DoCoMo may stop distributing pattern data for models that have been on the marker for 3 years or more. Setting Scanning Function Default Set scan:On Set message scan:On When Scanning Function is set to "ON", data and programs to be performed are automatically checked. M[Menu]X X"Set scan" (Settings)X"Lock/Security"X"Scanning function" "Set scan" / "Set message scan"X"ON"/"OFF" Setting Scan Function : When data that may cause troubles is detected, it is alerted in 5 levels.→P317 Setting Message Scan : When setting to "ON" and described the phone number and URL in SMS, the notation screen that described phone number and URL will be appeared when displaying the SMS at first. Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting 327 Updating Pattern Data M[Menu]X (Settings)X"Lock/Security"X"Scanning function" X "Update"X"Yes"X"Yes" Updating starts. Upon completion of update, a screen to notify the completion opens. • When the pattern data is the latest one, a message to that effect appears. C[OK] Note • During pattern data update, information (handset model, serial No., etc.) specific to your mobile phone is automatically sent to the server (software update server managed by DoCoMo). DoCoMo does not use the sent information for other purposes than Scanning Function. • Correctly set the clock of FOMA handset in advance. • Pattern data update is disabled in the following cases: - Date&Time is not set - Low battery level - UIM not inserted - Out of service area - During a call - Other functions are active - Self Mode - Lock all - Date access lock - Connected to external device such as PC To update the pattern data automatically Automatically update the pattern data to keep the latest data. On the scan screen, select "Set auto-update" to X"Enable"X"Yes". Scan Result Display 䂓 Display of problem elements after scanning When problem elements are detected, the problem elements is displayed as lists. XSelect "Detail" If data that may cause a problem is detected, a screen appears to show its warning level. Alert level 0 Alert level 1 Alert level 2 Alert level 3 䂓 When you detect an deletable data (Image to be added) "OK" : Continue with the operation. 328 (Image to be added) "Yes" : Stop operation and exit. "No" : Continue operation. Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting (Image to be added) "OK" : Stop operation exit. (Image to be added) "Yes" : Delete the data and return to the Stand-by display or the previous screen. "No" : Stop operation and return to the Stand-by display or previous screen. 䂓 When you detect an undeletable data (Image to be added) "OK" : Terminate the operation. Pressing "OK" again, returns to the Stand-by display returns or the previous screen. Note • The screen may be different from the above screen depending on the scanned result. 䂓 Display of problem elements after scanning Alert level 4 䂓 When you detect an deletable data (Image to be added) "OK" : Delete the data and exit. (Image to be added) Confirming Pattern Data Version M[Menu] X (Settings) X "Lock/Security" X "Scanning function" X "Version" Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting 329 Major Specifications Model name FOMA L705i Dimensions (H䌸 W䌸 D) ٨٨٨䌸 ٨٨䌸 ٨٨.٨ mm Weight Approximately ٨٨٨g (with battery pack installed) Continuous Standby Time Continuous Call Time FOMA䋯3G Stationary : Approx. ٨٨٨hours Moving : Approx. ٨٨٨ hours GSM/GPRS Approximately ٨٨٨ hours FOMA/3G Voice Call : Approximately. ٨٨٨ minutes Video Call : Approximately. ٨٨ minutes GSM/GPRS Charging time Color LCD Type TFT 262,144 colors Size Approx. 2.2 inches Pixels Image Censor Camera Record Approximately ٨٨٨ minutes AC Adapter : Approximately ٨٨٨ minutes DC Adapter : Approximately ٨٨٨ minutes 76,800 pixels 䋨 240㬍320䋩 Type Inner camera : CMOS Outer camera : CMOS Size Inner camera : 1/6 inch Outer camera : 1/4 inch Effective Pixels Inner camera : Approx. 0.32 mill. pixels Outer camera : Approx. 1.92 mill. pixels Recorded Pixels Inner camera : Approx. 0.3 mill. pixels Outer camera : Approx. 1.92 mill. pixels Zoom (Digital) Inner camera : Up to approx. 2 times Outer camera : Up to approx. 3 times Still Image Approx. 40000䋪1 Continuous mode CIF䋺 4 images䇭 Stand-by screen/QCIF/sub-QCIF/ for Phonebook/Menu icon䋺 6 images Still image file type JPEG Movie record time Approx. 60 seconds䋪2 Movie file type MP4 Play music Continuous playback time Approximately 30 hours Capacity Chaku-Uta® /Chaku-Uta Full® Approx. 100 MB 䋪1䋺 Image size : 128㬍96 Image quality : Standard File size : 10 K 䋪2䋺 Varies depending on the image size, quality and, capturing conditions. 䋪3䋺 Shared with the Music channel • Continuous call time is approximate duration of time to be spent for talking with normal radio wave reception level. • Continuous standby time is approximate duration of battery time while in motion. Depending on the battery level, set functions, operating environment such as ambient temperature, or radio wave reception level (Poor or weak radio wave reception level), battery life can reduced to half. When i-mode communications are performed, the call (communication)/standby time becomes shorter. Even if you do not make calls or perform i-mode communications, the call (communication)/standby time becomes short if you compose an i-mode mail, start a downloaded i-appli, start the i-appli stand-by display, perform data communications or multiaccess, use a camera, or playback videos or music. 330 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting • Continuous standby time in a stationary state is the average usage time in a stationary state with normal radio wave reception level while the handset is closed. • Continuous standby time in motion is the average usage time in a state combining "standstill", "in motion" and "out of service area" in an area with normal radio wave reception level while the handset is closed. • The estimated charging time is the duration of time to charge the battery pack with the FOMA handset turned off and with a fully drained battery pack. The charging time becomes longer with the FOMA handset turned on. Number of Items that can be Stored, Registered and Protected on the FOMA Handset The number of actual storable or registerable protection of each data counts varies depending on the data size or usage memory. Type Phonebook Schedule Schedule Holiday Maximum Number of Saved Messages Maximum Number of Saved Messages 1000䋪1 䋭 200 䋭 100 䋭 To Do 50 䋭 Memos 30 䋭 Received mail 1000 1000 Sent mail 500 500 ٨٨ 䋭 Message R 200 100 Message F Mail Unsent mail SMS on UIM Message 䋭 150 100 Bookmarks 100 䋭 Files contained in Screen Memos 50 10 i-appli 100䋪2 䋭 Databox Image 1000 䋭 Video/i-motion Movie 1000 䋭 Melody 1000 䋭 Animation 30 䋭 䋪1䋺 Up to 50 entries can be saved in UIM. 䋪2䋺 Including pre-installed i-appli Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting 331 Authentication Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) of Mobile Phones Mobile phone FOMA L705i meets the technical regulation defined by the government for absorption of radio waved to human body. This technical regulation has been established based on scientific studies so that radio waves emitted from radio devices such as mobile phones used near a human head give no bad influence to the human health. It defines that Specific Absorption Rate (SAR), representing the average amount of energy of radio waves absorbed to a temporal part of human body, should not exceed a permissible value of 2W/kg䋪. This permissible value includes a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of users, regardless of the age, body size and other conditions of individuals and is equal to the international guideline recommended by International Commission of Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) which has cooperative relationships with World Health Organization (WHO). All mobile phones should be confirmed to comply with the governmental regulation according to Radio Law before they are released. The SAR value of FOMA L705i is W/kg. This value has been acquired by Telecom Engineering Center (TELEC) and is the maximum value of those measured under the maximum transmission power of the mobile phone in the procedure defined by the government. Though there may be some differences in SAR value among individual products, they all meet the technical regulation. In addition, mobile phones are designed to have the lowest transmission power required for communication with base stations; therefore, the SAR value during actual phone operation becomes smaller. SAR value of this mobile phone meets the regulations of individual countries it is available. For further information about SAR, visit the following web sites: Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications Association of Radio Industries Businesses DoCoMo LG Mobile web page : http://www.tele.soumu.go.jp/e/ele/body/index.htm : http://www.arib-emf.org/index.html : http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/product/ : http://www.jp.lgmobile.com/ 䋪 : The technical regulation is defined in Article 1-2 of the Ministry Ordinance Regulating Radio Equipment. 332 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Radio Frequency (RF) Signals THIS MODEL PHONE MEETS THE U.S. GOVERNMENT'S REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your wireless phone contains a radio transmitter and receiver. Your phone is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg.䋪 Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the output. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the limit established by the U.S. government-adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed on position and locations (for example, at the ear and worn on the body) as required by FCC for each model. The highest SAR value for this model phone as reported to the FCC when tested for use at the ear is 0.202W/kg, and when worn on the body, is 0.096W/kg. (Body-worn measurements differ among phone models, depending upon available accessories and FCC requirements). While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the U.S. government requirement. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this model phone is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section at http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid after search on FCC ID BEJL705i. For body worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory designated for this product or when used with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the handset a minimum of 2.5 cm from the body. 䋪 In the United States, the SAR limit for wireless mobile phones used by the public is 1.6 watts/kg (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. SAR values may vary depending upon national reporting requirements and the network band. Declaration of Conformity The product "FOMA L705i" is declared to conform with the essential requirements of European Union Directive 1999/5/EC Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 3.1(a), 3.1(b) and 3.2. This mobile phone complies with the EU requirements for exposure to radio waves. Your mobile phone is a radio transceiver, designed and manufactured not to exceed the SAR䋪 limits䋪䋪 for exposure to radio-frequency (RF) energy, which SAR䋪 value, when tested for compliance against the standard was 1.00W/kg. While there may be differences between the SAR䋪 levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet䋪䋪䋪 the EU requirements for RF exposure. 䋪 The exposure standard for mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR 䋪䋪 The SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over ten grams of tissue, recommended by The Council of the European Union. The limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. 䋪䋪䋪 Tests for SAR have been conducted using standard operating positions with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station antenna, the lower the power output. Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting 333 Important Safety Information AIRCRAFT Switch off your wireless device when boarding an aircraft or whenever you are instructed to do so by airline staff. If your device offers a 'flight mode' or similar feature consult airline staff as to whether it can be used on board. DRIVING Full attention should be given to driving at all times and local laws and regulations restricting the use of wireless devices while driving must be observed. HOSPITALS Mobile phones should be switched off wherever you are requested to do so in hospitals, clinics or health care facilities. These requests are designed to prevent possible interference with sensitive medical equipment. PETROL STATIONS Obey all posted signs with respect to the use of wireless devices or other radio equipment in locations with flammable material and chemicals. Switch off your wireless device whenever you are instructed to do so by authorized staff. INTERFERENCE Care must be taken when using the phone in close proximity to personal medical devices, such as pacemakers and hearing aids. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 15cm be maintained between a mobile phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. To achieve this use the phone on the opposite ear to your pacemaker and do not carry it in a breast pocket. Hearing Aids Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult your hearing aid manufacturer to discuss alternatives. For other Medical Devices Please consult your physician and the device manufacturer to determine if operation of your phone may interfere with the operation of your medical device. 334 Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting Export Administration of This Product and Its Accessories (Confirming specs) Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting 335 Index/Quick Manual Index................................................................................................................................... 338 How to Use the Quick Manual.......................................................................................... 343 Quick Manual................................................................................................... End of the Manual 337 Index Using the Index 䃂 This index can be used not only as an usual index but also as a table of contents sorted in alphabetical order. You can find the terms used in this guide as well as the words that summarize the contents of the chapters or sections. If you cannot find what you are looking for, try another keywords. Ex) When you want to create a Deco-mail 䊂䉮 䊜 䊷䊦 ................................ 158 䊜 䊷䊦ᚑ................................ 157 ᚑ........................................ 158 ተవㅊട................................ 157 䊌䊧 䉾 䊃 䈱ᠲ .................... 159 ㅍା ....................................... 157 䊌䊧 䉾 䊃 ␜ ........................ 159 䊂䉮 䊜 䊷䊦ᚑ .................... 158 䊁 䊮 䊒䊧 䊷䊃 ㆬᛯ ................ 160 䊐 䉜 䉟 䊦䉕 ᷝઃ .................... 162 䊒䊧 䊎 䊠 䊷............................ 157 ሽ ....................................... 157 䃂 For the settings of the i-mode Center, such as Mail Address, Receive/Reject Mail, Limit Mail Size, or Suspend/Resume Mail settings, refer to "Mobile Phone User's Guide i-mode ". 䃂 For data communication, refer to the "Manual for Data Communication" guide included in the bundled CDROM. Numerics 184 䋯 186.................................58 A microSD Memory Card ........206 Backup ........................208, 209 Copy/overwrite personal data..................................208 Data update.........................209 Folder Structure...................210 Inserting/Removing .............206 Memory info.........................209 Read/write ...........................210 Reset microSD card ............207 Accessories...............................24 Additional guide ......................264 Additional Services .................263 Adding .................................263 Perform................................264 After-sales Service..................323 Alarm.......................................231 Animation Create..................................200 Operation.............................200 Anonymous caller ...................119 Answer mode ............................66 Any key answer.........................66 Auto Answer............................244 Backlight .................................103 Bar Code Reader ....................134 338 Index/Quick Manual Battery Level............................. 45 Battery Pack ............................. 41 Bookmarks.............................. 143 Compose message/ Send Mail ........................ 144 Connect............................... 143 Copy to microSD ................. 144 Delete.................................. 144 Edit title ............................... 144 List ...................................... 143 Send IrDA ........................... 144 Store ................................... 143 Calculator................................ 242 Call barring ............................. 277 Call display ............................. 100 Call duration............................ 239 Call forwarding........................ 259 Enable/disable Guidance .... 259 Call forwarding (Int.) ............... 278 Call waiting ............................. 257 Making Calls........................ 258 Receiving a Call .................. 258 Caller ID notification............ 48, 58 184 䋯 186............................. 58 Caller ID Request ................... 260 Caller ID request (Int.) ............ 279 Call/Mail history ........................ 90 Call/Mail lock........................... 114 Camera Capture movie..................... 130 Capture Still Images............ 129 Movie Capture Duration as a rough guide.............. 128 Camera Settings Brightness........................... 132 Delay timer.......................... 133 Switching between the Inner and Outer cameras ......... 133 Zoom................................... 132 Camera settings ..................... 133 Flicker turning ..................... 133 Shutter sound ..................... 133 Capture Still images ......................... 129 Videos................................. 130 Change i-mode Password ...... 142 Character Entry ...................... 247 Auto cursor ......................... 251 Input characters .................. 249 Input common phrases ....... 250 Input setting ........................ 251 Kuten Code......................... 253 Switching Input Modes........ 248 character entry Copy/Cut/Paste................... 252 Character Size i-mode................................. 148 Mail ..................................... 180 Charge................................ 42, 44 Charging time ....................... 43 Check new message ...... 150, 168 Check new SMS ..................... 182 Checking call costs................. 240 Clearing Memory .................... 246 Close setting............................. 66 Color theme ............................ 103 Common Phrases Input .................................... 250 List ...................................... 300 Compose message/ Send Mail ............................ 161 Add Address ....................... 161 Copy files Image Files ......................... 196 Melody files ......................... 204 Video/i-motion Files ............ 202 Copyrights ................................ 22 Country code Auto international dial ........... 61 Country code list ................... 62 Creating a folder Bookmarks .......................... 143 Data box ..................... 195, 196 Mail ..................................... 173 Custom Menu ......................... 238 Data access lock .................... 115 Data box ................................. 194 Data Communication .............. 265 AT Commands .................... 268 Operating Environment ....... 267 Preparing for Data Communication ............... 267 Date Counter .......................... 237 Date Search............................ 238 Date&Time format .................. 106 Deco-mail ............................... 162 Changing ............................ 164 Create ................................. 162 Palette Display .................... 163 Palette Operations .............. 163 Default settings....................... 292 Delete files Image Files ......................... 196 Melody files ......................... 204 Video/i-motion Files ............ 202 Deleting a folder Bookmarks .......................... 143 Data box ............................. 195 Mail ..................................... 174 Desk Adapter............................ 44 Dialing..................................... 101 Dialing Quick Search ................ 89 Display................................ 26, 32 Display Call/mail logs ............. 117 Display phonebook image ...... 102 Download Chaku-Uta Full®....................... 220 Dictionary ............................ 147 Image .................................. 145 i-melody .............................. 146 Template ............................. 146 Download Dictionary............... 254 DTMF........................................ 58 Dual Network .......................... 261 Edit ......................................... 251 Modify ................................. 252 Store ................................... 251 Edit Videos/i-motion Movies ... 203 Capture............................... 203 Clipping............................... 203 Edit word Delete ................................. 253 Editing still images ................. 198 Crop.................................... 199 Effect .................................. 198 Insert................................... 198 Mirror .................................. 198 Resize................................. 199 Retouch .............................. 198 Rotate ................................. 198 Undo ................................... 198 Emoticon List ...................................... 299 English guidance .................... 261 Entering Pictographs/ Symbols/Emoticons ............ 248 Error Messages ...................... 308 Export Administration ............. 335 External Connector Terminal.... 27 Files contained in Screen Memos 144 Delete ................................. 145 Edit title............................... 145 List ...................................... 144 Protect On/Off..................... 145 Retry ................................... 145 Save ................................... 144 ShowURL ........................... 145 View.................................... 144 View Details ........................ 145 Flash ...................................... 141 Operation............................ 197 Play..................................... 197 Setting as the Stand-by display..................... 196, 197 Flat-plug earphone/ microphone with switch ...... 244 Making Calls ....................... 244 Receiving a Call.................. 244 hands-free ................................ 74 Headphone/Microphone Jack .. 27 Holding tone ............................. 68 Hour indication ....................... 245 i-appli...................................... 183 Delete ................................. 190 Download............................ 185 Software info....................... 186 Start .................................... 185 Upgrade.............................. 186 i-appli DX................................ 184 i-appli info Auto start info ..................... 190 Security error history .......... 190 Trace info............................ 190 i-appli settings Access the Phonebook and History............................. 188 Auto-start.............................189 Change ring tone/image ......188 Display SW info ...................185 i-appli To Function...............189 Icon info...............................188 Network Set.........................188 i-appli To Function ..................147 i-Channel.................................154 Channel list..........................155 Trial Service ........................154 Ticker...................................155 i-Channel Setting Ticker setting .......................155 Illumination dot Settings..........105 Image Edit ......................................198 Full screen...........................196 Setting as the Stand-by display......................196, 197 View settings .......................197 Zoom ...................................196 Image Display .........................194 Operation.............................195 i-melody ..................................146 iMenu ......................................139 i-mode .....................................137 Add to phonebook ...............141 Bookmarks ..........................143 Change character code .......139 Compose message/ Send Mail.........................139 Display image......................140 Files contained in Screen Memos .............................144 Go To location .....................142 Last URL .............................140 My Menu..............................141 Operations on i-mode/ Web Sites ........................140 Reload .................................139 Retry....................................139 Save image .........................145 Site view ..............................139 Sound effect settings...........140 URL history..........................142 View Details.........................139 i-mode mail .............................158 i-mode Password ....................110 i-mode setting .........................147 Auto-display Message .........150 Connection Timeout ............148 Host Selection .....................149 i-motion Auto Play ...............153 i-motion type........................153 Melody Auto Play ................150 SSL Certificate Info .............152 i-motion ...................................152 Download ............................152 i-motion Auto Play ...............153 i-motion type........................153 In-call Arrival Act .....................261 Incoming call volume ................67 Infrared Port ............................212 Infrared remote control............213 Inner camera.............................26 Intellectual Property ..................22 Index/Quick Manual 339 International Access Code ........60 Auto assist setting .................61 International Prefix Settings..............................61 International Call .......................59 International Dial .................60, 61 International Roaming.............270 IrDA.........................................211 Receive all...........................213 Receive one ........................212 Send all data .......................212 Send one .............................212 Session code.......................212 Japan Article Number code.....134 Keypad sound ...........................96 Keypad unlock ........................116 Kuten Code Input ....................253 Last URL .................................140 List of the Ring tone (Pre-installed) ........................93 Lock all....................................113 Mail .................................157, 160 Add to phonebook ...............169 Auto sort ..............................171 Confirm File Attachment......169 Delete .........................174, 175, .........................176, 177, 178 Filter ....................175, 177, 178 Forward ...............................168 Protect On/Off .............175, 177 Reply ...................................168 Retrieve attached file...........169 Set security/Release security ............................173 View.............................167, 170 Mail ring duration ......................97 Mail setting..............................179 Mail To Function .....................147 Major Specifications................330 Manner Mode............................97 Manner mode set ......................98 Melody Adjust the volume................204 Set as alarm tone ................205 Set as ring tone ...................205 Memory status ........................245 Memos ....................................243 Store....................................243 View Contents .....................243 Menu Customization ...............104 Menu guidance .......................104 Menu List ................................282 Menu Operation ........................34 Main Menu.............................34 Notation .................................37 Notation Rules.......................38 Sub menu ..............................37 340 Index/Quick Manual Message R/F Add to phonebook ............... 151 Auto-display Message......... 150 Confirm File Attachment...... 169 Delete.................................. 151 Melody Auto Play ................ 150 Protect On/Off ..................... 151 Save image ......................... 145 View .................................... 150 MessageR/F Message ............................. 149 Missed Call ............................... 71 Move files Image Files.......................... 196 Melody files ......................... 204 Video/i-motion Files............. 202 Movie-Mode ............................ 130 Multi number ........................... 262 Confirming the Primary Number............................ 262 Setting Primary Number...... 262 Multi-Access ........................... 230 Combinations ...................... 302 Multitasking............................. 230 Combinations ...................... 303 Music channel Chapter list .......................... 218 Operation ............................ 217 Play programs ..................... 217 Play saved programs .......... 219 Playback in background ...... 228 Save program...................... 219 Set Programs ...................... 216 Music channel player .............. 217 Music life................................. 228 Music Player ........................... 221 Operation ............................ 222 My Menu (i-mode)................... 141 My Pictures ............................. 195 Network mode......................... 276 Network search mode............. 276 Network Security Code ........... 110 Network Services.................... 255 New Passwords ...................... 111 Noise Reduction ....................... 64 Nuisance Call Blocking ........... 259 Specify ................................ 260 Number of Items that can be Stored, Registered and Protected on the FOMA handset ............................... 331 Number Settings ..................... 262 On hold ..................................... 67 On hold tone ............................. 68 Operator name display ........... 277 Options and Related Devices .. 24, 305 Outer camera............................ 27 Overseas Use ......................... 269 After Coming Back to Japan273 Available Services............... 270 Making Calls........................ 273 Network Services................ 278 Preparation before Departure ... 271 Receiving a Call.................. 275 Usage at destination ........... 272 Own number ..................... 48, 239 Password Network Security Code ....... 110 Security code ...................... 110 Pause ....................................... 58 Phone Call ................................ 49 International Call................... 59 making .................................. 50 Receive................................. 64 Phone number display.............. 48 Phone To/AV Phone To Function .............................. 147 Phonebook ............................... 75 About the Phonebook ........... 76 Delete ................................... 87 Edit........................................ 87 Handset (Phone)................... 77 Multiple choice ...................... 88 Number of contacts............... 88 Save (Received Call History, etc..) ..................... 80 Save (UIM)............................ 79 View Contents....................... 84 Phonebook settings .................. 88 Photo Light ............................... 27 Photo-Mode ............................ 129 Pictograph List ...................................... 298 PIN Unlock Code ............ 111, 112 PIN1 code request.................. 112 Play Melodies ......................... 204 Operation ............................ 204 Pause.................................. 204 Play music .............................. 220 Continuous Play.................. 222 Delete ................................. 226 Display Jacket image.......... 224 Download Chaku-Uta-Full® ............. 220 Music channel player .......... 217 Music life............................. 228 MUSIC Menu ...................... 221 Music Player ....................... 221 Playback in background...... 228 Playlist ................................ 224 Quick playlist....................... 226 Save SD-Audio ................... 220 SD-Audio Player ................. 227 Set as alarm tone................ 223 Set as ring tone................... 223 View Lyrics.......................... 224 Play Videos/i-motion Movies ................................ 201 Fast forward/Rewind........... 201 Operation ............................ 201 Playback in background ......... 228 Playlist Create ................................. 224 Play..................................... 225 Portrait Rights........................... 22 Power On/Off............................ 46 Power Saving Mode ............... 103 Preferred NW lists .................. 276 Prefix dial.................................. 63 Preinstalled............................. 194 Protect On/Off Files contained in Screen Memos ............................ 145 Message R/F ...................... 151 Received mail ..................... 175 Sent mail ............................. 177 Public Mode (Drive Mode) ........ 68 Public Mode (Power OFF) ........ 70 QR Code................................. 134 Quality alarm ............................ 97 Quick Manual.......................... 342 Quick playlist .......................... 226 Receive option........................ 167 Received Calls.......................... 56 Add to phonebook................. 80 Received mail BOX ................ 170 Received mails ....................... 178 Receiver volume....................... 67 Recent calls .............................. 57 Recent Mails........................... 178 Reconnect Alarm ...................... 64 Record Message ...................... 71 Settings ................................. 71 Record message ...................... 72 Redial ....................................... 54 Add to phonebook................. 80 Reject all calls......................... 119 Reject on List.......................... 118 Reject unknown caller ............ 121 Remote access setting (Int.) ......................... 279 Remote Control ...................... 262 Renaming a folder Bookmarks .......................... 143 Data box ............................. 195 Mail ..................................... 173 Reset i-Channel...................... 155 Reset learnt info ..................... 253 Reset/Clear............................. 245 Roaming guidance setting ...... 277 Roaming guide (Int.) ............... 278 SAR ........................................ 332 Save/Edit Group Name............. 81 Scanning Function.................. 327 Schedule................................. 232 Register New Schedule Events ............................. 232 View Contents..................... 234 SD-Audio Player ..................... 227 Operation ............................ 222 Search phonebook ................... 83 Domain? ............................... 84 Group search ........................ 83 Memory No. search............... 84 Phone number? .................... 84 Reading Search.................... 84 Search all data...................... 83 Secret mode ........................... 117 Security code ......................... 110 Security Settings ............ 109, 122 Select effect tone ..................... 96 Select language ..................... 107 Select ringtone ......................... 92 Self mode ............................... 115 Send a file Image Files ......................... 196 Melody files......................... 205 Video/i-motion Files ............ 202 Sent mail BOX........................ 170 Sent mails .............................. 178 Service numbers .................... 262 Services Available from FOMA Handset ................... 304 Set as alarm tone..................... 202, 205, 223 Set call cost limit .................... 240 Set date&time........................... 47 Set in-call arrival act ............... 260 Set mute ring(sec.) ................. 121 shortcut icons ........................... 33 Show shortcut icons ............... 100 Site view ................................. 139 Slide up .................................... 66 SMS Add to phonebook .............. 169 Create................................. 181 Delete . 174, 175, 176, 177, 178 Filter.................... 175, 177, 178 Focused data...................... 181 Forward .............................. 168 Protect On/Off............. 175, 177 Reply .................................. 168 Save ................................... 181 Set security/Release security............................ 173 UIM Functions ... 175, 176, 177, 178 SMS Settings ......................... 182 Auto sort ............................. 171 Entering SMS Message Text ................................. 182 SMS center......................... 182 SMS Report request ........... 182 SMS Validity Period............ 182 softkey ...................................... 31 Software Update .................... 325 Sort Message R/F ...................... 151 Received mail ..................... 174 Sent mail............................. 176 Template............................. 165 Unsent mail......................... 178 Sorting folders Bookmarks.......................... 143 Data box ............................. 195 Mail ..................................... 173 SSL communication ............... 140 Stand-by display....................... 99 Stopwatch .............................. 241 Sub Address............................. 63 Sub Menu Operation ................ 37 Symbol List List ...................................... 297 Template .................................164 Create New .........................165 Delete ..................................165 Download ............................146 Edit title................................165 List.......................................165 Select ..................................165 The UIM ....................................38 Inserting / Removing .............38 Operation Restriction Function .............................39 Password...............................39 Types.....................................40 Ticker i-Channel .............................155 i-motion........................153, 201 To do.......................................235 Store....................................235 View Contents .....................236 Touchpad ......................26, 29, 30 Sensitivity ..............................30 Touchpad sensitivity settings ..............................30 Touch-Tone Signals..................58 Trademarks...............................22 Troubleshooting ......................306 UIM PIN ..........................111, 112 Change................................112 UIM PIN2 ................................111 Change................................112 Unit converter..........................241 Unsent mail BOX ....................171 URL history .............................142 Usage Time...............................43 USB mode setting ...................210 User Defined Dictionary ..........253 Valid/Invalid Set the selected certificate to valid or invalid. .................152 Vibrator .....................................95 Video Phone Hands-free call ......................74 Holding image .......................73 making...................................50 Receive .................................64 Response hold image............73 Substitute image....................53 Swap View.............................53 Switch camera.......................53 Video phone settings ................73 Video Play Software................305 Video/i-motion Movie Edit ......................................203 Set as alarm tone ........202, 203 Set as ring tone ...................202 Setting as the Stand-by display......................202, 203 View file information Flash file ..............................197 Image Files..........................197 Melody files .........................205 Index/Quick Manual 341 Video/i-motion Files.............203 Voice call’s on-hold-tone...........68 Voice mail ...............................256 Notify missed call ................257 Voice mail (Int.) .......................278 Volume......................................94 Wake-up display .....................102 Warranty .................................323 Web To Function.....................147 WORLD CALL...........................59 World Clock.............................240 WORLD WING........................270 Compose message/ Send Mail Attach file.............................166 Create deco-mail .................162 Focused data.......................161 Preview................................161 Save ....................................161 Select template....................164 342 Index/Quick Manual How to Use the Quick Manual To use the Quick Manual bound in this manual, cut the pages along the cutting line and fold them as shown below. Take along Quick Manual (For Overseas Use) with you when using international roaming (WORLD WING) abroad. • When using scissors, be careful not to hurt yourself. Detach the Quick Manual by cutting along the cutoff line Fold lengthwise ⚕ Fold widthwise twice ⚕ 344 Index/Quick Manual ⚕ Quick Manual DoCoMo Information Center 䂓 From a DoCoMo handset or PHS: 151(no area code) (toll free) 䂓 From a fixed line phone: 㶎 The above number is not available from a fixed line phone. 0120-800-000 Repairs 䂓 From a DoCoMo handset or PHS: 㶎 The above number is not available from a fixed line phone. 113 (no area code) (toll free) 0120-800-000 䂓 From a fixed line phone: Saving Contacts from Dialed Calls/Received Calls " Phone number" X Enter a Phone number " Mail address" X Enter a Mail address " (Select group)" X Select a Group • Verify the number before making a call. Use L/Rto display the Received call/ Redial logs X Select the Received call/ Redial logs X M[Menu] X "Add to PhoneBook" Select a storing method • "New registration": Add a new entry to a Phonebook. Go to Step 4 • "Additional registration": Add an item to a saved Phonebook entry. Select a Phonebook to save Modify/save Phonebook entries X I [Done] Saving Contacts Saving Contacts on the UIM " (Save to)" X "Phone" " (Enter Memory No.)" X Enter a memory number On the stnad-by display XU(for more than 1 seconds) " Name" X Enter a Name " Reading" X Enter a Reading " Phone number" X Enter a Phone number 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 " Mail address" X Enter a Mail address " (Group)" X Enter a secret code " (Select group)"" X Select a Group " Image" X Select an image or i-motion " Ringtone" X Select a ring tone if the caller is stored in the Phonebook " Mail ringtone" X Select a mail tone if the caller is stored in the Phonebook " URL" X Enter the URL " ZIP code" X Enter a ZIP code " Home Address" X Enter a Home Address " Company name" X Enter a company name " Job title" X Enter a Job title " Co. zip code" X Enter a Co. zip code " Co. address" X Enter a Co. address " Memo" X Enter a memo " (Birthday)" X Enter a birthday or others Main Operations on the Character Entry Screen 䂓 Switching entry modes Press I[Mode] 1 time. 䂓 Switching full-pitch/half-pitch 䂓 Switching Pictograph (E-Moji)/Emoticon/ Symbol entry mode Press A several times. 䂓 Entering voiced/semivoiced sound symbol or switching upper/lower case Enter a character and press *several times 䂓 Entering punctuation Press * several times 䂓 Entering line feed #䋯D 䂓 Entering space M[Menu]X"Special input" X"Space"/at the end of a sentenceR Editing Phonebook Input characters Select a Phonebook X M[Menu] X "Edit"X Store/Edit Phonebook X I[Done] Character Entry Screen a Available number of characters: Indicates the remaining number of characters that can be entered in bytes. b Operation guide field: Shows switching among pictographs, symbols, and emoticons, and switching between full- and half-pitch characters. c Entry mode guidance area: Indicates entry mode. 22 " Substitute image" X Select a substitute image M[Menu] X phonebook" (Phonebook) X "Add to " (Save to)" X "FOMA card (UIM)" " Name" X Enter a Name " Reading" X Enter a Reading Saving Contacts on the UIM Example of Character Entry 䉨䊥 䊃 䊥 ✢ M[Menu] X (Camera) X "Photo-mode". Frame the shot then C [Take] C[Save] Select a destination folder X C[OK] Capturing Still Images Using the Camera Use D to move the cursor to conversion options X Use K to select " 䊄 䉮 䊝 (DoCoMo)" 䂓 Entering " 䊄 䉮 䊝 (DoCoMo)" 1 Enter " 䈬 䈖 䉅 (DoCoMo)" " 䈬 (Do)": Press 4 5 times X*once " 䈖 (Co)": Press 2 5 times " 䉅 (Mo)": Press 7 5 times Playing Music Data M[Menu] X (Camera) X "Movie-mode" Frame the shot thenC C[Save] Select a destination folder X C [OK] Attaching Files 12 䂓 Attaching an image On the Compose message screen(P13), M[Menu] X "Attach file" X "Attach File" X "Image" X Move the cursor to the folder X C"Open" X Select a image 䂓 Attaching an i-motion movie On the Compose message screen(P11), selectM[Menu] X "Attach file" X "Attach file" X "Movie" X Move the cursor to the folder X C"Open" X Select an i-motion 䂓 Attaching a melody On the Compose message screen(P11), selectM[Menu] X "Attach file" X "Attach File" X "Melody" X Move the cursor to the folder X C"Open" X Select a Melody Select (Subject) field X Enter the subject Select (Message) field X Enter the subject I[Send] Adjust the volume Pause/Play H F/E Description Key 1 G X "Music player" X "All songs" 2 Move the cursor to a song X C[Play] 䂓 Key operation while playing Capturing Videos Display the Music data list screen Quit the Music player I[List] GX"Music player"X"Playlist" Move the cursor to playlist you want to play XC[Play] Making Video calls. Enter a phone number XM[Menu]X"Video phone call"XStart talking when the other party answers To terminate the call P Receiving i-mode Mails Other Mail Functions IX"Check New Message" Check new message i-mode mail arrives X "mail "X Select a folder X Select an i-mode mail to display 13 䂓 Replying to Mail Select to display the mail to be replaced to X M[Menu] X "Reply" X "Reply"/Reply quoted" X Enter subject and message text X I[Send] 䂓 Capturing and attaching a still image/ video On the Compose message screen (P11), M[Menu] X "Activate camera" X "Photo-mode"/"Movie-mode" X Capture a still image/video X C[OK] Making/Receiving a Video Call Playback in background Play a playlists Rewind/fast forward while being pressed L/R (Hold down) Description Play from the beginning of the current chapter or go to the previous chapter/play the next chapter Key L/R Main Operations during Video Calls A video call arrives • F/ E: Adjust the Ring Volume • P: Place the call on response hold. • I[Substitute image ] : Send substitute image To terminate the call P i-mode Mail Icon 14 Function names Received mail Sent mail Unsent mail Compose message Check new message Receive option SMS Template Mail setting iMenu Bookmark Files contained in Screen Memos Last URL Go To location Message i-Channel Check new message i-mode setting Menu List 䂓 Forwarding Mail Select to display the mail to forward X M [Menu] X "Forward" X Enter an address X I[Send] 10 䂓 Placing a call on hold/Canceling hold M[Menu]X"Hold" • C䋺 Cancel hold 䂓 Setting/Canceling handsfree call C[Spk on] • Press C again to cancel. 䂓 Switching between camera image/ substitute image I[Substitute] Receiving Video Calls DX"Compose message" Icon MUSIC Data box Function names Software list i-appli info i-appli settings Add to phonebook Search phonebook Number of contacts Phonebook settings Call/Mail history Call duration Call Cost My Pictures Music Music channel i-motion Melody SD Audio Recent played䋪 Music Player Music channel SD-Audio Player Bar Code Reader Receive Ir data microSD card Custom Menu 11 15 䉨䊥 䊃 䊥 ✢ 䋪 : "Playing" is displayed when playing a music. Lifekit Compose i-mode mail screen Select (Receiver) field X "Input Address" X Enter the address Phonebook i-appli Message Subject Receiver Composing/Sending i-mode Mail i-mode mail • Press I again to return to the camera image. 䂓 Switching between the Inner and Outer cameras M[Menu] X "Switch camera" • Select "Switch camera" again to return to the Inner camera. Lifekit Icon Camera Stationery Settings Function names Record Message Stopwatch Photo-mode Movie-mode Bar Code Reader Camera settings Schedule Alarm Memos To Do 䊥 䉴 䊃 World Clock Calculator Unit converter Remembering dates Sounds&vibration Select ringtone Select effect tone Volume Vibrator Manner mode set Mail ring duration Set mute ring(sec.) Stand-by display Call display Icon Settings Icon Settings Function names International roaming Call forwarding (Int.) Remote access setting (Int.) Caller ID request (Int.) Roaming guide (Int.) Call barring International Dial Auto assist setting International Prefix Settings Auto international dial Country code list Date&Time Set date&time Date&Time format Hour indication Other Character Entry Memory status Select language Power Saving Mode Reset/Delete Software Update USB mode setting Touchpad settings Battery Level 18 View 17 Answering Incoming Call Terminating Current Call Function names View Wake-up display Dialing Menu Display Settings Backlight Color theme Illumination dot Settings Call/VT/Dialing Incoming call Video Phone Call feature Self mode Prefix dial Sub Address Earphone Lock/Security Lock Secret mode Display Call/mail logs Keypad unlock Change Security code PIN code Scanning Function International roaming Network Voice mail (Int.) 16 Call waiting Activate call waiting Deactivate call waiting Activate Call Forwarding Service M[Menu] X (Service) X "Call waiting" X Deactivate" X [Yes] Answering Incoming Call Putting Current Call on Hold Receive a call X A 䂓 Switching the calls M[Menu] X "Switch" 䂓 Disconnecting the current call 䂓 Disconnecting a call put on hold M[Menu] X "Switch" X P 21 (No assistance provided for subscribers not listed) 22 Phone Number Directory assistance of fixed line phones (No prefix) 104 and DoCoMo mobile phones (pay service: service and call charges) Services Available from FOMA Handset Services Available from the FOMA Handset M[Menu] X (Service) X "Call forwarding" X "Deactivate" X "Yes" Deactivate M[Menu] X (Service) X "Call forwarding" X "Activate call forwarding" X "Yes" X "Register the forwarding number" X Enter the phone number to forward X "Ring time" X HDial keys to enter the ringing time X M"Done" M[Menu] X (Service) X "Call waiting" X "Activate" X [Yes] Incoming call X M[Menu] X "End active call " Manner Mode #(for 1+ seconds) on the Stand-by display Public Mode (Drive Mode) *(for 1+ seconds) on the Stand-by display Network Services Voice mail service Play messages M[Menu]X (Service)X"Voice mail"X "Play messages"X"Yes"XFollow the instructions of the voice guidance Active voice mail M[Menu] X (Service) X "Voice mail" X "Activate voice mail" X "Yes" X "Yes" X Dial keys to enter the ringing time Deactive voice mail M[Menu] X (Service)X"Voice mail" X "Deactivate" X "Yes" 20 Icon Own number Service Service Function names Voice mail Call waiting Call forwarding Nuisance Call Blocking Nuisance Call Blocking Caller ID notification Caller ID Request Set in-call arrival act Arrival call act Other 䉨䊥 䊃 䊥 ✢ Phone Number (No prefix) 115 (No prefix) 117 Area code + 177 (No prefix) 110 (No prefix) 119 (No prefix) 118 (No prefix) 171 (No prefix) 106 Additional Services Additional guide English guidance Service numbers Roaming guidance setting Multi number Dual Network Remote Control 19 Services Available from FOMA Handset Telegraph (charges apply : telegram fee) Time check (charges apply) Weather forecast (charges apply) Police emergency Fire and ambulance Marine emergency call and accident reports Message Dial of disaster (charges apply) Collect call (Charges apply to the receiver) 23 s Strong Weak 28 There is a set alarm → P231 There are TO DO activities today → P232 There are TO DO activities today with their alarms activated→ P231, P232 Inserting microSD Memory Card → P206 Audio ringer for voice/video call is inactive, vibrator is inactive → P94, P95 Mail/message receipt ringer active, vibrator is inactive →P94, P95 Mail/message receipt ringer inactive, vibrator is active → P94, P95 Mail/message receipt ringer active, vibrator is active → P94, P95 Mail/message receipt ringer inactive, vibrator is inactive →P94, P95 Public Mode (Drive Mode) is set → P68 Modifying Voicemail Settings →P71 Audio Ringer for voice/video call is active, vibrator is also active → P94, P95 24 Radio wave reception level → P48 y z AB C l m n o pq r s t u v w x a b c d e fg h i j k Main Icons Out of Service Area / No Reception → P48 29 When you set "Secret data only mode" to "On"→ P117 When you set both "Call/Mail lock" and "Secret data only mode" to "On" → P115, P117 Configuring Sent Mail limit → P114 Configuring Received Mail limit → P114 Configuring Sent and Received Mail limit→ P114 When you set "Call/Mail lock" to "On" → P115 When you set "Secret mode" to "On" → P117 When you set both "Call/Mail lock" and "Secret mode" to "On" → P115, P117 Configuring voice/video calls usage limit→ P114 Configuring voice/video calls reception limit→ P114 Configuring voice/video calls usage and reception limit→ P114 25 (White) There is a MessageR at the i-mode Center→ P150 (Pink) i-mode center mailbox is full (White) i-mode mail from i-mode center→ P167 30 Several Unread Mails (with number of the mails) You should update your pattern data Pattern Data has been updated → P328 UIM not inserted / UIM has produced an error→ P40 i-appli automatic execution has failed →P190 Call costs have exceeded the limit →P240 Music channel episode download complete → P216 Music channel episode download failed →P216 Downloading music channel episode →P216 Booking downloading music channel program →P216 Connecting to an external device via USB cable → P210 Linking to Terminal 26 (Pink) Handset MessageR section is full (White) There is an unread MessageF→ P150 (Pink) MessageR is full (White) There is an unread MessageR→ P150 Handset Mailbox and UIM SMS sections are full During Packet Communication Sending/Receiving Packet Data UIM's SMS section is full (Pink) Handset Mailbox is full (White) There is an unread i-mode mail and SMS (White) There is an unread i-mode mail at the i-mode Center → P166 (White) There is an unread SMS→ P182 Sending/Receiving Packet Data During Packet Communication Toggle Engage/Disengage Packet On/Off connection Toggle Ongoing i-mode transmission / On/Off i-channel message reception → P139 Toggle i-mode Connection engaged → P139 On/Off (White) There is a i-mode mail and MessageR/F at the i-mode Center Self Mode is set → P115 (Pink) i-mode Mail and Message R/F at i-mode center is full (White) There is a MessageF at the i-mode Center →P150 (Pink) MessageF at the i-mode Center is full Out of Service Area / No Reception → P48 Radio wave reception level →P48 (Pink) MessageR at the i-mode Center is full Self Mode is set → P115 (Blue) (Pink) 䌾 There are Voice mail messages(with number of the calls)→ P256 New Record message have been recorded(with number of the messages) Several Missed Calls(with number of the calls) 27 Manner Mode is activated → P97 Original Manner Mode is activated →P98 Audio ringer for voice/video call is active, vibrator is inactive →P94, P95 Audio ringer for voice/video call is inactive, vibrator is active →P94, P95 Configuring Full-lock → P113 Battery level → P47 Alarm has executed while several tasks are running. Several tasks are currently being restarted in the background A task is currently being restarted in the background An i-appli i-appliDX is running →P185 A task is currently being executed → P230 Several tasks are currently being executed An i-appli is running → P185 A SSL Page is open→P152 31 䉨䊥 䊃 䊥 ✢ 㶎 Verify the number before making a call. 䇭䇭 䇭䇭䇭䇭䇭> 䇭䇭䇭䇭䇭䇭䇭> (24 hours) -81-3-5366-3114䋪(Free) From a DoCoMo handset International Access Code for your Current Location (Table 1) phone call charges to Japan 䋪 From a fixed line phone, International apply. 䋪 From L705i dial 䋫 81-3-5366-3114 (to enter "+", press 0 (for 1+ seconds)). From a fixed line phone: -800-0120-0151䋪 International Phone Code for a Universal Numbers (Table 2) 䋪 Domestic call charges for your overseas location will apply to calls. 䋪 For International Access Code for Major Countries(Table 1), see P.13. For the International Phone Code for a Universal Number (Table 2), see P.14. Switching Networks By default, "Network search mode" is set to "Auto". When you use the FOMA handset in Japan or in the areas where 3G area network is available, it is recommended to switch "Network mode" to "WCDMA only" to reduce the consumption of the battery pack. M[Menu] X (Settings) X "International roaming" X "Network" "Network mode" X "WCDMA only" /"GSM only" "Network search mode" X"Manual" X "Yes" X Select a network Setting the Network Manually Network Technical Operation Center (24 hours) From a DoCoMo handset -81-3-6718-1414 䋪(Free) International Access Code for your Current Location (Table 1) 䋪 From a fixed line phone, International phone call charges to Japan apply. 䋪 From L705i dial 䋫 81-3-6718-1414 (to enter "+", press 0 (for 1+ seconds)). From a fixed line phone: -800-5931-8600 䋪 International Phone Code for a Universal Numbers (Table 2) 䋪 Domestic call charges for your overseas location will apply to calls. 䋪 For International Access Code for Major Countries(Table 1), see P.13. For the International Phone Code for a Universal Number (Table 2), see P.14. 䃂 If your handset is lost or stolen, contact DoCoMo immediately and temporarily halt the subscription. Setting Remote Control I X"䌩 Menu" X"English i-menu" X "Options" X"International Settings" X "i-mode services Settings" X "Yes" X Select i-mode password field X Enter i-mode Password X "Select" i-mode setting Preparation for Overseas Use M[Menu] X (Service) X"Others" X "Remote control" X"Activate" X"Yes" Dual Clock Settings SMS i-mode mail i-mode Video Phone Voice call 䂾 䂾 䂾 䂾 䂾 䂾 䂾 3䌇 㬍 㬍 䂾 㬍 㬍 㬍䋪 䂾 GSM 䂾 䂾 䂾 䂾 䂾 㬍䋪 䂾 GPRS Communication System and Available Services i-Channel Service Data Communication 䂾 䋺 Available 㬍 䋺 Not available 䋪 䋺 When a call is made, a redial confirmation screen opens. Select "Redial voice call" to redial Voice Call. After Coming Back to Japan M[Menu] X (Settings X"Display" X "Stand-by display" X"Clock type" X"Dual clock" X"2-nd City" XMover the cursor to a city by Pressing JXI[Select]X I[Done] Display 䃂 If theFOMAhandset which you purchased is broken, please bring it to the service center. Setting Preferred Networks "Network mode" X "Auto" M[Menu] X (Settings) X "International roaming" X "Network" "Preferred NW lists" "Network search mode" X "Auto" 䉨䊥 䊃 䊥 ✢ An icon indicating the currently connected network appears on the Display. The connected carrier name also appears on the Display. Network names appear in order of priority. 䋪 The network name does not appear when the handset is connected to the FOMA network in Japan. bConnected carrier name Connected to a FOMA network in Japan Connected to a 3G network overseas Connected to a GSM network overseas Connected to a GPRS network overseas aIcons indicating the connected network (Image to be added) When you have returned to Japan, FOMA handset is automatically connected to FOMA network and appears at the top of the screen. If the FOMA network is not connected , perform the following settings. 1 M[Menu]X (Settings)X"International roaming" X "Network" I[Add] X "UPLMN manual select" X Enter MCC and MNC X I[Done] 8 0 (for 1+ seconds) X Enter "Country Code - Area Code (City Code) - Phone Number" • Omit the leading "0" (zero) from the city code or from a phone number of Japanese mobile phone of PHS (in some countries or regions such as Italy, the leading "0" may be required). • Country code → P12 Call • A : Make a voice call • M [Menu] X"Video phone call" : Make a video call To terminate the call P Area U.S.A. U.K. Italy India Indonesia Egypt Australia Australia Netherlands Canada Korea Greece Singapore Switzerland Sweden Spain Thailand Taiwan Tahiti Code 44 39 91 62 20 61 43 31 82 30 65 41 46 34 66 886 689 12 Area Czech China Germany Turkey Japan New Caledonia New Zealand Norway Hungary Fiji Philippines Finland France Brazil Vietnam Peru Belgium Hong Kong Macao Code 420 86 49 90 81 687 64 47 36 679 63 358 33 55 84 51 32 852 853 Use the following numbers when you use international call or a country number in international dial As of 䃂 2007 Country Codes of Major Countries Making a Call to Japan or Countries Other than the Country of Usage Making Calls A call arrives • I [Silent] :Stop the ring tone • P : Place the call on response hold. Receiving a Call • A : Answer a voice call • A : Answer a video call (with Camera image) • A [Image] : Answer a video call (with Camera image) To terminate the call P Receiving a Call Enter the phone number with the area code (city code) in the same way as in Japan Call • A : Make a voice call • M [Menu] X "Video phone call" : Make a video call To terminate the call P Area Ireland U.S.A. U.A.E. U.K. Italy India Indonesia Australia Netherlands Canada Korea Greece Singapore Switzerland Sweden Spain Thailand Code 00 011 00 00 00 00 001 0011 00 011 001 00 001 00 00 00 001 13 Vietnam France Brazil Area Taiwan Czech China Denmark Germany Turkey New Zealand Norway Hungary Philippines Finland Code 002 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 䋯 990 00 0041 䋯 0021 䋯 0023 00 As of 䃂 2007 International Access Codes of Major Countries (Table 1) Area Code Area Code Malaysia 60 Russia Maldives 960 䋪 For the codes of the other countries and details, see the DoCoMo's web page international Services. Making Call inside the Country Where You Stay Area Malaysia Monaco Luxemburg Russia 10 Code 00 00 00 001 00 Code 00 00 00 810 Area Ireland U.S.A. Argentina U.K. Israel Italy Australia Australia Netherlands Canada Korea Colombia Singapore Switzerland Sweden Spain Area Thailand Taiwan China Denmark Germany New Zealand Norway Philippines Finland France Brazil Belgium Hong Kong Malaysia Luxemburg 14 Code 00 011 00 00 014 00 0011 00 00 011 001 009 001 00 00 00 Code 001 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 990 00 0021 00 001 00 00 As of 䃂 2007 International Phone Codes for Universal Numbers (Table 2) Area Belgium Poland Portugal Hong Kong Macao • Setting must be done while in Japan. M[Menu] X (Settings) X "International roaming" X "Call barring" X "Activate - roam" X "Barring all incoming calls"/"Data calls barring" X Enter network security code X "OK" Call barring • Setting must be done while in Japan. M[Menu] X (Service) X "Others" X "Roaming guidance" X "Activate"/"Deactivate" X"OK" Roaming guidance setting • Setting must be done while in Japan. M[Menu] X (Service) X "Others" X "Remote control" X "Activate"/"Deactivate" X"OK" Remote Control Network Services Voice mail (Int.) 15 䉨䊥 䊃 䊥 ✢ • The contact numbers must be prefixed with the code assigned to the country of stay as shown in the "International Access Codes of Major Countries (Table1)" or "International Phone Code for a Universal Numbers (Table2)". For loss or theft of the handset, settlement of charges, or handset failure while overseas, contact the DoCoMo Information Center on the front page of "Overseas Use" or the Network Technical Operation Center on Page 1. For inquiries 11 M[Menu] X (Settings) X "International roaming" X "Roaming guide(Int.)" X "Select" X Follow the instructions of the voice guidance Roaming Guidance (Intl) M[Menu] X (Settings) X "International roaming" X "Call forwarding (Int.)" X "Activate"/ "Deactivate" X Follow the instructions of the voice guidance Call forwarding (Int.) M[Menu] X (Settings) X "International roaming" X "Voice mail (Int.)" X "Activate"/ "Deactivate"/"Play messages" X Follow the instructions of the voice guidance Don't forget your FOMA handset or your manners! When using the FOMA handset, be considerate and do not disturb people around you. Always turn OFF your FOMA handset in the following situations: 䂓 Where use is prohibited Be sure to turn off your FOMA handset in airplanes and in hospitals. 㶎 Persons using electronic medical equipment are in places other than the actual wards. Make sure you have the power switched off even if you are in a lobby or waiting room. 䂓 When in crowded places such as packed trains, where you could be near a person with an implanted cardiac pacemaker or implanted defibrillator. The implanted cardiac pacemaker or implanted defibrillator operation may be affected by radio emissions from the FOMA handset. In the following cases, be certain to set Public Mode. 䂓 While driving Using the FOMA handset interferes with safe driving and could cause danger. 㶎 Park the car in a safe place before using the FOMA handset, or switch to Public Mode. 䂓 When in theaters, movie theaters, museums, and similar venues If you use your FOMA handset where you are supposed to be quiet, you will disturb those around you. Pay attention to your surroundings and the loudness of your voice and Ring tone 䂓 Do not raise your voice when using the FOMA handset in quiet places such as in restaurants or hotel lobbies. 䂓 Use the handset so as not to disturb pedestrian traffic. Consider privacy Please be considerate of other people's privacy when capturing and sending pictures using camera-equipped mobile phones. These functions help you keep your manners in public Handy functions are available such as for setting the response to incoming calls and setting the tones to silent 䃂Public Mode (Drive mode/Power off) The guidance is played announcing that you are in such a place as train, bus or movie theater where you have to turn off the handset, and the call is disconnected. →P68䇮 P70 䃂Record Message Callers can record a message when you cannot come to the phone.→ P71 䃂Incoming Vibrate When the vibrate is set, it vibrates for incoming calls. → P95 䃂Manner Mode/Original Manner Mode In Manner Mode, the Key tone, Ring tone or every other sound generated by the FOMA handset are silenced.(General manner mode) →P97 You can change the operation of the FOMA handset in Manner Mode(Original manner mode) →P98 This manual was produced in such a way as to allow easy recycling. Please recycle this manual when it is no longer needed.
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Encryption : Standard V2.3 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Print high-res XMP Toolkit : 3.1-701 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows) Create Date : 2007:10:25 13:06:37-04:00 Modify Date : 2007:10:25 13:11:29-04:00 Metadata Date : 2007:10:25 13:11:29-04:00 Creator Tool : PScript5.dll Version 5.2 Document ID : uuid:28CFDE581C83DC119B0BAFE288EE90DB Instance ID : uuid:5f09826a-10cd-4d1a-ac2c-5fdc118a49b3 Derived From Document Name : uuid:2da408cc-375e-428b-bf6a-103660cb5c92 Derived From Document ID : uuid:b6d9753c-fcbe-404c-9d22-a29a4d3566f0 Format : application/pdf Title : untitled Creator : mia Has XFA : No Page Count : 175 Author : miaEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools